Pioneer GPS Receiver AVIC X7115BT User Manual

Operation Manual  
FLASH MEMORY MULTIMEDIA AV NAVIGATION  
RECEIVER  
AVIC-X9115BT  
AVIC-X7115BT  
Notice to all users:  
This software requires that the navigation system is  
properly connected to your vehicles parking brake and  
depending on your vehicle, additional installation may  
be required. For more information, please contact your  
Authorized Pioneer Electronics retailer or call us at  
(800) 421-1404.  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
3
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
4
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
5
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
6
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
7
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
8
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
Information to User  
This equipment complies with FCC radiation  
exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled  
equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency  
(RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to  
OET65. This equipment has very low levels of  
RF energy that it deemed to comply without  
maximum permissive exposure evaluation  
(MPE). But it is desirable that it should be in-  
stalled and operated with at least 20cm and  
more between the radiator and persons body  
(excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and  
ankles).  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC  
Rules. Operation is subject to the following  
two conditions:  
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-  
ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter-  
ference received, including interference that  
may cause undesired operation.  
Alteration or modifications carried out without  
appropriate authorization may invalidate the  
users right to operate the equipment.  
CAUTION:  
USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PER-  
FORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN  
THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN  
HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.  
CAUTION:  
THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH  
THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HA-  
ZARD.  
FCC ID : AJDK020  
MODEL NO. : AVIC-X9115BT  
IC : 775E-K020  
FCC ID : AJDK020  
MODEL NO. : AVIC-X7115BT  
IC : 775E-K020  
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules  
and RSS-Gen of IC Rules. Operation is subject  
to the following two conditions: (1) this device  
may not cause interference, and (2) this device  
must accept any interference, including inter-  
ference that may cause undesired operation of  
this device.  
WARNING  
Handling the cord on this product or cords asso-  
ciated with accessories sold with the product will  
expose you to chemicals listed on proposition 65  
known to the State of California and other govern-  
mental entities to cause cancer and birth defect  
or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after  
handling.  
MADE IN CHINA  
For Canadian model  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with  
Canadian ICES-003.  
This transmitter must not be co-located or op-  
erated in conjunction with any other antenna  
or transmitter.  
9
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
neering, disassembly, decompilation, or any  
other means. You shall not use the Software to  
operate a service bureau or for any other use  
involving the processing of data for other per-  
sons or entities.  
Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall retain all copy-  
right, trade secret, patent and other proprie-  
tary ownership rights in the Software. The  
Software is copyrighted and may not be cop-  
ied, even if modified or merged with other pro-  
ducts. You shall not alter or remove any  
copyright notice or proprietary legend con-  
tained in or on the Software.  
You may transfer all of your license rights in  
the Software, the related documentation and a  
copy of this License Agreement to another  
party, provided that the party reads and agrees  
to accept the terms and conditions of this Li-  
cense Agreement.  
License Agreement  
PIONEER AVIC-X9115BT, AVIC-  
X7115BT- for U.S.A.  
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN  
YOU, AS THE END USER, AND PIONEER  
ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. (PIONEER).  
PLEASE READ THE TERMS AND CONDI-  
TIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BE-  
FORE USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON  
THE PIONEER PRODUCTS. BY USING THE  
SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER  
PRODUCTS, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY  
THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFT-  
WARE INCLUDES A DATABASE LICENSED BY  
THIRD PARTY SUPPLIER( S) (SUPPLIERS),  
AND YOUR USE OF THE DATABASE IS COV-  
ERED BY THE SUPPLIERSSEPARATE  
TERMS, WHICH ARE ATTACHED TO THIS  
AGREEMENT (Refer to page 14). IF YOU DO  
NOT AGREE WITH ALL OF THESE TERMS,  
PLEASE RETURN THE PIONEER PRODUCTS  
(INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE, AND ANY  
WRITTEN MATERIALS) WITHIN FIVE (5) DAYS  
OF RECEIPT OF THE PRODUCTS, TO THE  
AUTHORIZED PIONEER DEALER FROM  
WHICH YOU PURCHASED THEM. USE OF  
THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE  
YOUR CONSENT TO THE LICENSE AGREE-  
MENT.  
2
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY  
The Software and related documentation are  
provided to you AS IS. PIONEER AND ITS LI-  
CENSOR(S) (for the purpose of provisions 2  
and 3, Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall be col-  
lectively referred to as Pioneer) MAKES AND  
YOU RECEIVE NO WARRANTY FOR THE SOFT-  
WARE, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,  
AND ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL-  
ITY AND FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE FOR THE SOFTWARE ARE EX-  
PRESSLY EXCLUDED. SOME STATES DO NOT  
ALLOW EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRAN-  
TIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT  
APPLY TO YOU. The Software is complex and  
may contain some nonconformities, defects or  
errors. Pioneer does not warrant that the Soft-  
ware will meet your needs or expectations,  
that operation of the Software will be error free  
or uninterrupted, or that all non-conformities  
can or will be corrected. Furthermore, Pioneer  
does not make any representations or warran-  
ties regarding the use or results of the use of  
the Software in terms of its accuracy, reliability  
or otherwise.  
1
GRANT OF LICENSE  
Pioneer grants to you a non-transferable, non  
exclusive license to use the software installed  
on the Pioneer products (the Software) and  
the related documentation solely for your own  
personal use or for internal use by your busi-  
ness, only on such Pioneer products.  
You shall not copy, reverse engineer, translate,  
port, modify or make derivative works of the  
Software. You shall not loan, rent, disclose,  
publish, sell, assign, lease, sublicense, market  
or otherwise transfer the Software or use it in  
any manner not expressly authorized by this  
agreement. You shall not derive or attempt to  
derive the source code or structure of all or  
any portion of the Software by reverse engi-  
10  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
3
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY  
regulations of the United States. If the Soft-  
ware has been rightfully obtained by you out-  
side of the United States, you agree that you  
will not re-export the Software nor any other  
technical data received from Pioneer, nor the  
direct product thereof, except as permitted by  
the laws and regulations of the United States  
and the laws and regulations of the jurisdic-  
tion in which you obtained the Software.  
IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE  
FOR ANY DAMAGES, CLAIM OR LOSS IN-  
CURRED BY YOU (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIM-  
ITATION, COMPENSATORY, INCIDENTAL,  
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR  
EXEMPLARY DAMAGES, LOST PROFITS, LOST  
INCOME, LOST SALES OR BUSINESS, EXPEN-  
DITURES, INVESTMENTS, OR COMMITMENTS  
IN CONNECTION WITH ANY BUSINESS, LOSS  
OF ANY GOODWILL, OR DAMAGES) RESULT-  
ING FROM THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE  
THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF PIONEER HAS  
BEEN INFORMED OF, KNEW OF, OR SHOULD  
HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELIHOOD OF  
SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES  
TO ANY AND ALL CAUSES OF ACTION INDIVI-  
DUALLY OR IN THE AGGREGATE, INCLUDING  
WITHOUT LIMITATION BREACH OF CON-  
TRACT, BREACH OF WARRANTY, NEGLI-  
GENCE, STRICT LIABILITY,  
MISREPRESENTATION, AND OTHER TORTS.  
IF PIONEERS WARRANTY DISCLAIMER OR  
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SET FORTH IN THIS  
AGREEMENT SHALL OR FOR ANY REASON  
WHATSOEVER BE HELD UNENFORCEABLE  
OR INAPPLICABLE, YOU AGREE THAT  
PIONEERS LIABILITY SHALL NOT EXCEED  
FIFTY PERCENT (50%) OF THE PRICE PAID BY  
YOU FOR THE ENCLOSED PIONEER PRO-  
DUCT.  
5
TERMINATION  
This Agreement is effective until terminated.  
You may terminate it at any time by destroying  
the Software. The Agreement also will termi-  
nate if you do not comply with any terms or  
conditions of this Agreement. Upon such ter-  
mination, you agree to destroy the Software.  
6
U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS  
If the Software is being acquired by or on be-  
half of the United States government or any  
other entity seeking or applying rights similar  
to those customarily claimed by the United  
States government, the Data is licensed with  
Limited Rights. Utilization of the Software is  
subject to the restrictions specified in the  
Rights in Technical Dataclause at DFARS  
252.227-7013, or the equivalent clause for non-  
defense agencies. Pioneer Electronics (USA)  
Inc., 2265 East 220th Street, Long Beach, CA  
90810.  
Some states do not allow the exclusion or lim-  
itation of incidental or consequential da-  
mages, so the above limitation or exclusion  
may not apply to you. This warranty disclaimer  
and limitation of liability shall not be applic-  
able to the extent that they are prohibited by  
any applicable federal, state or local law which  
provides that such a disclaimer or limitation  
cannot be waived or preempted.  
7
MISCELLANEOUS  
This is the entire Agreement between Pioneer  
and you regarding its subject matter. No  
change in this Agreement shall be effective  
unless agreed to in writing by Pioneer. Pioneer  
retailers do not have the authority to change  
this Agreement. This Agreement shall be gov-  
erned by and construed in accordance with  
the internal laws of the State of California. If  
any provision of this Agreement is declared in-  
valid or unenforceable, the remaining provi-  
sions of this Agreement shall remain in full  
force and effect.  
4
EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES  
You agree and certify that neither the Software  
nor any other technical data received from  
Pioneer, nor the direct product thereof, will be  
exported outside the United States except as  
authorized and as permitted by the laws and  
11  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
other means. You shall not use the Software to  
operate a service bureau or for any other use  
involving the processing of data for other per-  
sons or entities.  
Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall retain all copy-  
right, trade secret, patent and other proprie-  
tary ownership rights in the Software. The  
Software is copyrighted and may not be cop-  
ied, even if modified or merged with other pro-  
ducts. You shall not alter or remove any  
copyright notice or proprietary legend con-  
tained in or on the Software.  
You may transfer all of your license rights in  
the Software, the related documentation and a  
copy of this License Agreement to another  
party, provided that the party reads and agrees  
to accept the terms and conditions of this Li-  
cense Agreement.  
PIONEER AVIC-X9115BT, AVIC-  
X7115BT- for Canada  
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN  
YOU, AS THE END USER, AND PIONEER  
ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.  
(PIONEER). PLEASE READ THE TERMS AND  
CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT CARE-  
FULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE IN-  
STALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS. BY  
USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE  
PIONEER PRODUCTS, YOU AGREE TO BE  
BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREE-  
MENT. THE SOFTWARE INCLUDES A DATA-  
BASE LICENSED BY THIRD PARTY SUPPLIER  
(S) (SUPPLIERS), AND YOUR USE OF THE  
DATABASE IS COVERED BY THE SUPPLIERS’  
SEPARATE TERMS, WHICH ARE ATTACHED  
TO THIS AGREEMENT (Refer to page 14). IF  
YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH ALL OF THESE  
TERMS, PLEASE RETURN THE PIONEER PRO-  
DUCTS (INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE, AND  
ANY WRITTEN MATERIALS) WITHIN FIVE (5)  
DAYS OF RECEIPT OF THE PRODUCTS, TO  
THE AUTHORIZED PIONEER DEALER FROM  
WHICH YOU PURCHASED THEM. USE OF  
THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE  
YOUR CONSENT TO THE LICENSE AGREE-  
MENT.  
2
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY  
The Software and related documentation are  
provided to you AS IS. PIONEER AND ITS LI-  
CENSOR(S) (for the purpose of provisions 2  
and 3, Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall be col-  
lectively referred to as Pioneer) MAKES AND  
YOU RECEIVE NO WARRANTY FOR THE SOFT-  
WARE, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,  
AND ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL-  
ITY AND FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE FOR THE SOFTWARE ARE EX-  
PRESSLY EXCLUDED. SOME STATES DO NOT  
ALLOW EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRAN-  
TIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT  
APPLY TO YOU. The Software is complex and  
may contain some nonconformities, defects or  
errors. Pioneer does not warrant that the Soft-  
ware will meet your needs or expectations,  
that operation of the Software will be error free  
or uninterrupted, or that all non-conformities  
can or will be corrected. Furthermore, Pioneer  
does not make any representations or warran-  
ties regarding the use or results of the use of  
the Software in terms of its accuracy, reliability  
or otherwise.  
1
GRANT OF LICENSE  
Pioneer grants to you a non-transferable, non  
exclusive license to use the software installed  
on the Pioneer products (the Software) and  
the related documentation solely for your own  
personal use or for internal use by your busi-  
ness, only on such Pioneer products.  
You shall not copy, reverse engineer, translate,  
port, modify or make derivative works of the  
Software. You shall not loan, rent, disclose,  
publish, sell, assign, lease, sublicense, market  
or otherwise transfer the Software or use it in  
any manner not expressly authorized by this  
agreement. You shall not derive, or attempt to  
derive, the source code or structure of all or  
any portion of the Software by reverse engi-  
neering, disassembly, decompilation, or any  
12  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
3
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY  
obtained by you outside of Canada, you agree  
that you will not re-export the Software nor any  
other technical data received from Pioneer,  
nor the direct product thereof, except as per-  
mitted by the laws and regulations of Canada  
and the laws and regulations of the jurisdic-  
tion in which you obtained the Software.  
IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE  
FOR ANY DAMAGES, CLAIM OR LOSS IN-  
CURRED BY YOU (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIM-  
ITATION, COMPENSATORY, INCIDENTAL,  
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR  
EXEMPLARY DAMAGES, LOST PROFITS, LOST  
SALES OR BUSINESS, EXPENDITURES, IN-  
VESTMENTS, OR COMMITMENTS IN CON-  
NECTION WITH ANY BUSINESS, LOSS OF  
ANY GOODWILL, OR DAMAGES) RESULTING  
FROM THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE  
THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF PIONEER HAS  
BEEN INFORMED OF, KNEW OF, OR SHOULD  
HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELIHOOD OF  
SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES  
TO ALL CAUSES OF ACTION IN THE AGGRE-  
GATE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION  
BREACH OF CONTRACT, BREACH OF WAR-  
RANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, MIS-  
REPRESENTATION, AND OTHER TORTS. IF  
PIONEERS WARRANTY DISCLAIMER OR  
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SET FORTH IN THIS  
AGREEMENT SHALL OR FOR ANY REASON  
WHATSOEVER BE HELD UNENFORCEABLE  
OR INAPPLICABLE, YOU AGREE THAT  
PIONEERS LIABILITY SHALL NOT EXCEED  
FIFTY PERCENT (50%) OF THE PRICE PAID BY  
YOU FOR THE ENCLOSED PIONEER PRO-  
DUCT.  
5
TERMINATION  
This Agreement is effective until terminated.  
You may terminate it at any time by destroying  
the Software. The Agreement also will termi-  
nate if you do not comply with any terms or  
conditions of this Agreement. Upon such ter-  
mination, you agree to destroy the Software.  
6
MISCELLANEOUS  
This is the entire Agreement between Pioneer  
and you regarding its subject matter. No  
change in this Agreement shall be effective  
unless agreed to in writing by Pioneer. Pioneer  
retailers do not have the authority to change  
this Agreement. This Agreement shall be gov-  
erned by and construed in accordance with  
the internal laws of the Province of Ontario  
and the federal laws of Canada applicable  
therein. If any provision of this Agreement is  
declared invalid or unenforceable, the remain-  
ing provisions of this Agreement shall remain  
in full force and effect.  
Some states do not allow the exclusion or lim-  
itation of incidental or consequential da-  
mages, so the above limitation or exclusion  
may not apply to you. This warranty disclaimer  
and limitation of liability shall not be applic-  
able to the extent that they are prohibited by  
any applicable federal, state or local law which  
provides that such a disclaimer or limitation  
cannot be waived or preempted.  
4
EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES  
You agree and certify that neither the Software  
nor any other technical data received from  
Pioneer, nor the direct product thereof, will be  
exported outside Canada except as authorized  
and as permitted by the laws and regulations  
of Canada. If the Software has been rightfully  
13  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
CHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AC-  
CURACY, TITLE AND FITNESS FOR A  
Terms and Conditions for the  
Tele Atlas Data  
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT (THE AGREE-  
MENT) BETWEEN YOU, THE END USER, AND  
TELE ATLAS NORTH AMERICA, INC. (Tele  
Atlas). BY USING YOUR COPY OF THE TELE  
ATLAS DATA, YOU AGREE TO THE TERMS  
AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT.  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. NO ORAL OR WRIT-  
TEN ADVICE OR INFORMATION PROVIDED  
BY TELE ATLAS OR ANY OF ITS AGENTS, EM-  
PLOYEES OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS  
SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY, AND YOU ARE  
NOT ENTITLED TO RELY ON ANY SUCH AD-  
VICE OR INFORMATION. THIS DISCLAIMER  
OF WARRANTIES IS AN ESSENTIAL CONDI-  
TION OF THE AGREEMENT.  
1
Grant of License.  
Tele Atlas grants you a non-transferable, non-  
exclusive license to use the map data and  
business points of interest information (the  
POIs), (together, the Data) contained on  
these discs, solely for personal, non-commer-  
cial use and not to operate a service bureau or  
for any other use involving the processing of  
data of other persons or entities. You may  
make one (1) copy of the Data for archival or  
backup purposes only but you may not other-  
wise copy, reproduce, modify, make derivative  
works, derive the structure of or reverse engi-  
neer the Data. The Data contains confidential  
and proprietary information and materials,  
and may contain trade secrets, so you agree to  
hold the Data in confidence and in trust and  
not to disclose the Data or any portions in any  
form, including by renting, leasing, publish-  
ing, leasing, sublicensing or transferring the  
Data to any third party. You are prohibited  
from removing or obscuring any copyright, tra-  
demark notice or restrictive legend.  
4
Limitation of Liability.  
TELE ATLAS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU  
FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,  
SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR EXEMPLARY DA-  
MAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS AGREEMENT,  
INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR COSTS OF  
COVER, LOSS OF USE OR BUSINESS INTER-  
RUPTION OR THE LIKE, REGARDLESS OF  
WHETHER YOU WERE ADVISED OF THE POS-  
SIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOTWITH-  
STANDING ANYTHING TO THE CONTRARY  
CONTAINED HEREIN, TELE ATLAS SHALL  
HAVE NO MONETARY LIABILITY TO YOU FOR  
ANY CAUSE (REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF  
ACTION) UNDER OR RELATING TO THIS  
AGREEMENT.  
5
Termination.  
This Agreement will terminate immediately  
and automatically, without notice, if you  
breach any term of this Agreement. You agree  
that in the event of termination of the Agree-  
ment, you shall return the Data (including all  
documentation and all copies) to Tele Atlas  
and its suppliers.  
2
Ownership.  
The Data is copyrighted by Tele Atlas and its li-  
censors and they retain all ownership rights in  
the Data. You agree not to alter, remove, oblit-  
erate, or obscure any copyright notice or pro-  
prietary legend contained in or on the Data.  
3
Warranty Disclaimer.  
THE DATA IS PROVIDED ON AN AS ISAND  
WITH ALL FAULTS BASISAND TELE ATLAS  
AND ITS SUPPLIERS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM  
ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IN-  
CLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MER-  
14  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
6
Indemnity.  
it is agreed that the Data is a trade secret and  
a proprietary commercial product and not sub-  
ject to disclosure.  
You agree to indemnify, defend and hold Tele  
Atlas, its Licensors, and its Suppliers (includ-  
ing their respective licensors, suppliers, as-  
signees, subsidiaries, affiliated companies,  
and the respective officers, directors, employ-  
ees, shareholders, agents and representatives)  
free and harmless from and against any liabili-  
ty, loss, injury (including injuries resulting in  
death), demand, action, cost, expense, or  
claim of any kind or character, including but  
not limited to attorneys fees, arising out of or  
in connection with any use or possession by  
you of the Data.  
If you are an agency, department, or other en-  
tity of any State government, the United States  
Government or any other public entity or  
funded in whole or in part by the United States  
Government, then you hereby agree to protect  
the Data from public disclosure and to consid-  
er the Data exempt from any statute, law, regu-  
lation, or code, including any Sunshine Act,  
Public Records Act, Freedom of Information  
Act, or equivalent, which permits public ac-  
cess and/or reproduction or use of the Data.  
In the event that such exemption is challenged  
under any such laws, this Agreement shall be  
considered breached and any and all right to  
retain any copies or to use of the Data shall be  
terminated and considered immediately null  
and void. Any copies of the Data held by you  
shall immediately be destroyed. If any court of  
competent jurisdiction considers this clause  
void and unenforceable, in whole or in part,  
for any reason, this Agreement shall be con-  
sidered terminated and null and void, in its en-  
tirety, and any and all copies of the Data shall  
immediately be destroyed.  
7
U.S. Government Rights.  
If you are an agency, department, or other en-  
tity of the United States Government, or  
funded in whole or in part by the United States  
Government, then use, duplication, reproduc-  
tion, release, modification, disclosure or trans-  
fer of this commercial product and  
accompanying documentation, is restricted in  
accordance with the LIMITED or RESTRICTED  
rights as described in DFARS 252.227-7014(a)  
(1) (JUN 1995) (DOD commercial computer  
software definition), DFARS 227.7202-1 (DOD  
policy on commercial computer software),  
FAR 52.227-19 (JUN 1987) (commercial com-  
puter software clause for civilian agencies),  
DFARS 252.227-7015 (NOV 1995) (DOD techni-  
cal data commercial items clause); FAR  
52.227-14 Alternates I, II, and III (JUN 1987) (ci-  
vilian agency technical data and noncommer-  
cial computer software clause); and/or FAR  
12.211 and FAR 12.212 (commercial item ac-  
quisitions), as applicable. In case of conflict  
between any of the FAR and DFARS provisions  
listed herein and this License, the construc-  
tion that provides greater limitations on the  
Governments rights shall control. Contractor/  
manufacturer is Tele Atlas North America,  
Inc., 11 Lafayette Street, Lebanon, NH 03766-  
1445. Phone: 603.643. 0330. The Data is  
8
Additional Provisions with respect to  
POI Data only.  
a
b
c
No Creation of Mailing Lists.  
You are prohibited from using the POIs (i) to  
create mailing lists or (ii) for other such si-  
milar uses.  
Compliance.  
You will use the POIs in compliance with all  
applicable federal, state and local laws,  
rules and regulations.  
Indemnification.  
You shall indemnify and hold infoUSA, Inc.  
harmless against all third party claims or  
liability which are based in whole or in part  
of the users failure to comply with such  
laws, rules and regulations or which result  
from the use of the POIs through you.  
Warranty.  
©1984-2009 by Tele Atlas. ALL RIGHTS RE-  
SERVED. For purpose of any public disclosure  
provision under any federal, state or local law,  
d
15  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
In addition to the Warranties contained in  
the Agreement, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT  
THE POIS ARE LICENSED ON AN AS IS”  
BASIS WITHOUT GUARANTEE, AND  
THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES  
MADE WHETHER, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,  
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  
or unenforceable, such provision or part there-  
of shall be stricken from this Agreement and  
the remainder of this Agreement shall be  
valid, legal, and enforceable to the maximum  
extent possible. Any notice under this Agree-  
ment shall be delivered by courier to Tele Atlas  
North America, Inc., Attention Contracts De-  
partment, 11 Lafayette Street, Lebanon, NH  
03766 USA. The covenants and obligations un-  
dertaken by you herein are intended for the di-  
rect benefit of Tele Atlas and may be enforced  
by Tele Atlas directly against you.  
e
POIs Segregation.  
You are prohibited from combining or mer-  
ging the POIs with any other POI data. The  
POIs shall be maintained in such a way  
that they are separately identifiable from all  
other POI data at all times.  
Licenses  
7-Zip  
7-Zip  
9
Agreement in English.  
License for use and distribution  
7-Zip Copyright (C) 1999-2007 Igor Pavlov.  
Licenses for files are:  
The parties hereto confirm that they have re-  
quested that this Agreement and all attach-  
ments and related documents be drafted in  
English.  
Les parties ont exigé que le présent contrat et  
tous les documents attachés soient rédigés en  
Anglais.  
1
7z.dll: GNU LGPL + unRAR restriction  
2
All other files: GNU LGPL  
The GNU LGPL + unRAR restriction means  
that you must follow both GNU LGPL rules  
and unRAR restriction rules.  
You can use 7-Zip on any computer, including  
a computer in a commercial organization. You  
don't need to register or pay for 7-Zip.  
10 Miscellaneous.  
This is the exclusive and complete Agreement  
between Tele Atlas and you regarding its sub-  
ject matter. Nothing in this Agreement shall  
create a joint venture, partnership or principal-  
agent relationship between Tele Atlas and you.  
The internal laws of California shall govern  
this Agreement and you consent to the juris-  
diction of the Northern District of California or  
the State of California for the County of Santa  
Clara. Sections 2 10 shall survive the expira-  
tion or termination of this Agreement. This  
Agreement may be amended, altered, or modi-  
fied only by Tele Atlas. You may not assign any  
part of this Agreement without Tele Atlasprior  
written consent. You acknowledge and under-  
stand that the Data may be subject to restric-  
tions on exportation and agree to comply with  
any applicable export laws. In the event that  
any provision or part of a provision of this  
Agreement is determined to be invalid, illegal,  
GNU LGPL information  
This library is free software; you can redistri-  
bute it and/or modify it under the terms of the  
GNU Lesser General Public License as pub-  
lished by the Free Software Foundation; either  
version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option)  
any later version.  
This library is distributed in the hope that it  
will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;  
without even the implied warranty of MER-  
CHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICU-  
LAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General  
Public License for more details.  
16  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
You should have received a copy of the GNU  
Lesser General Public License along with this  
library; if not, write to the Free Software Foun-  
dation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Bos-  
ton, MA 02111-1307 USA  
Defining a subclass of a class defined by the  
Library is deemed a mode of using an inter-  
face provided by the Library.  
A Combined Workis a work produced by  
combining or linking an Application with the  
Library. The particular version of the Library  
with which the Combined Work was made is  
also called the Linked Version.  
The Minimal Corresponding Sourcefor a  
Combined Work means the Corresponding  
Source for the Combined Work, excluding any  
source code for portions of the Combined  
Work that, considered in isolation, are based  
on the Application, and not on the Linked Ver-  
sion.  
The Corresponding Application Codefor a  
Combined Work means the object code and/or  
source code for the Application, including any  
data and utility programs needed for reprodu-  
cing the Combined Work from the Application,  
but excluding the System Libraries of the Com-  
bined Work.  
unRAR restriction  
The decompression engine for RAR archives  
was developed using source code of unRAR  
program.  
All copyrights to original unRAR code are  
owned by Alexander Roshal.  
The license for original unRAR code has the  
following restriction:  
The unRAR sources cannot be used to re-cre-  
ate the RAR compression algorithm, which is  
proprietary. Distribution of modified unRAR  
sources in separate form or as a part of other  
software is permitted, provided that it is clearly  
stated in the documentation and source com-  
ments that the code may not be used to devel-  
op a RAR (WinRAR) compatible archiver.  
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE  
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE  
Version 3, 29 June 2007  
Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation,  
Inc. <http://fsf.org/>  
1
Exception to Section 3 of the GNU GPL.  
You may convey a covered work under sec-  
tions 3 and 4 of this License without being  
bound by section 3 of the GNU GPL.  
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute  
verbatim copies of this license document, but  
changing it is not allowed.  
This version of the GNU Lesser General Public  
License incorporates the terms and conditions  
of version 3 of the GNU General Public Li-  
cense, supplemented by the additional per-  
missions listed below.  
2
Conveying Modified Versions.  
If you modify a copy of the Library, and, in your  
modifications, a facility refers to a function or  
data to be supplied by an Application that  
uses the facility (other than as an argument  
passed when the facility is invoked), then you  
may convey a copy of the modified version:  
a
under this License, provided that you make  
a good faith effort to ensure that, in the  
event an Application does not supply the  
function or data, the facility still operates,  
and performs whatever part of its purpose  
remains meaningful, or  
0
Additional Definitions  
As used herein, this Licenserefers to version  
3 of the GNU Lesser General Public License,  
and the GNU GPLrefers to version 3 of the  
GNU General Public License.  
The Libraryrefers to a covered work gov-  
erned by this License, other than an Applica-  
tion or a Combined Work as defined below.  
An Applicationis any work that makes use of  
an interface provided by the Library, but which  
is not otherwise based on the Library.  
b
under the GNU GPL, with none of the addi-  
tional permissions of this License applic-  
able to that copy.  
17  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
a modified Combined Work, in the man-  
ner specified by section 6 of the GNU  
GPL for conveying Corresponding  
Source.  
Use a suitable shared library mechan-  
ism for linking with the Library. A suita-  
ble mechanism is one that (a) uses at  
run time a copy of the Library already  
present on the users computer system,  
and (b) will operate properly with a mod-  
ified version of the Library that is inter-  
face-compatible with the Linked Version.  
3
Object Code Incorporating Material  
from Library Header Files.  
The object code form of an Application may in-  
corporate material from a header file that is  
part of the Library. You may convey such ob-  
ject code under terms of your choice, provided  
that, if the incorporated material is not limited  
to numerical parameters, data structure lay-  
outs and accessors, or small macros, inline  
functions and templates (ten or fewer lines in  
length), you do both of the following:  
2
a
Give prominent notice with each copy of  
the object code that the Library is used in it  
and that the Library and its use are covered  
by this License.  
Accompany the object code with a copy of  
the GNU GPL and this license document.  
e
Provide Installation Information, but only if  
you would otherwise be required to provide  
such information under section 6 of the  
GNU GPL, and only to the extent that such  
information is necessary to install and exe-  
cute a modified version of the Combined  
Work produced by recombining or relinking  
the Application with a modified version of  
the Linked Version. (If you use option 4d0,  
the Installation Information must accom-  
pany the Minimal Corresponding Source  
and Corresponding Application Code. If you  
use option 4d1, you must provide the Instal-  
lation Information in the manner specified  
by section 6 of the GNU GPL for conveying  
Corresponding Source.)  
b
4
Combined Works.  
You may convey a Combined Work under  
terms of your choice that, taken together, ef-  
fectively do not restrict modification of the por-  
tions of the Library contained in the Combined  
Work and reverse engineering for debugging  
such modifications, if you also do each of the  
following:  
a
Give prominent notice with each copy of  
the Combined Work that the Library is used  
in it and that the Library and its use are cov-  
ered by this License.  
5
Combined Libraries.  
You may place library facilities that are a work  
based on the Library side by side in a single li-  
brary together with other library facilities that  
are not Applications and are not covered by  
this License, and convey such a combined li-  
brary under terms of your choice, if you do  
both of the following:  
b
c
Accompany the Combined Work with a  
copy of the GNU GPL and this license doc-  
ument.  
For a Combined Work that displays copy-  
right notices during execution, include the  
copyright notice for the Library among  
these notices, as well as a reference direct-  
ing the user to the copies of the GNU GPL  
and this license document.  
a
Accompany the combined library with a  
copy of the same work based on the Library,  
uncombined with any other library facilities,  
conveyed under the terms of this License.  
Give prominent notice with the combined li-  
brary that part of it is a work based on the  
Library, and explaining where to find the ac-  
companying uncombined form of the same  
work.  
d
Do one of the following:  
1
Convey the Minimal Corresponding  
Source under the terms of this License,  
and the Corresponding Application  
Code in a form suitable for, and under  
terms that permit, the user to recombine  
or relink the Application with a modified  
version of the Linked Version to produce  
b
18  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
6
Revised Versions of the GNU Lesser  
7-Zip Source Notice  
General Public License.  
The software program used in this product  
contains 7-Zip library. 7-Zip contains the soft-  
ware granted permission for the usage under  
the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public Li-  
cense. A copy of appropriate source code is  
available at customer necessary expense for  
the distribution.  
The Free Software Foundation may publish re-  
vised and/or new versions of the GNU Lesser  
General Public License from time to time.  
Such new versions will be similar in spirit to  
the present version, but may differ in detail to  
address new problems or concerns.  
Each version is given a distinguishing version  
number. If the Library as you received it speci-  
fies that a certain numbered version of the  
GNU Lesser General Public License or any  
later versionapplies to it, you have the option  
of following the terms and conditions either of  
that published version or of any later version  
published by the Free Software Foundation. If  
the Library as you received it does not specify  
a version number of the GNU Lesser General  
Public License, you may choose any version of  
the GNU Lesser General Public License ever  
published by the Free Software Foundation.  
If the Library as you received it specifies that a  
proxy can decide whether future versions of  
the GNU Lesser General Public License shall  
apply, that proxys public statement of accep-  
tance of any version is permanent authoriza-  
tion for you to choose that version for the  
Library.  
Please contact our Customer Support Center  
to obtain a copy. For more information on the  
GNU Lesser General Public License, visit the  
GNUs website at http://www.gnu.org.  
About the database  
About the Data for the Map  
Database  
!
Modifications related to roads, streets/high-  
ways, terrain, construction and other things  
before/during the development period may  
not be reflected in this database. Inevitably,  
those modifications after that period are  
not reflected in this database.  
!
!
For more details about the map coverage of  
this navigation system, refer to the informa-  
tion on our website.  
It is strictly prohibited to reproduce and use  
any part or the whole of this map in any  
form without permission from the copyright  
owner.  
!
!
If the local traffic regulations or conditions  
deviate from this data, follow the local traf-  
fic regulations (such as signs, indications,  
etc.) and conditions (such as construction,  
weather, etc.).  
The traffic regulation data used in the map  
database applies only to standard sized  
passenger vehicles. Note that regulations  
for larger vehicles, motorbikes, and other  
non-standard vehicles are not included in  
the database.  
19  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
Copyright Notices for North  
American data  
Important Safety Information  
WARNING  
1) Tele Atlasâ MultiNetâ North America data.  
As of the Effective Date, the copyright notice  
for Tele Atlasâ MultiNetâ North America is:  
NOTICE  
!
Do not attempt to install or service your navi-  
gation system by yourself. Installation or servi-  
cing of the navigation system by persons  
without training and experience in electronic  
equipment and automotive accessories may  
be dangerous and could expose you to the  
risk of electric shock or other hazards.  
ã 1984 2009 Tele Atlas. All rights reserved.  
This material is proprietary and the subject of  
copyright protection and other intellectual  
property rights owned or licensed to Tele Atlas.  
Tele Atlas is an authorized distributor of se-  
lected Statistics Canada computer files under  
Agreement number 6776. The product in-  
cludes information copied with permission  
from Canadian authorities, including ã Cana-  
da Post Corporation and GeoBaseâ, All rights  
reserved. The product is sourced in part from  
Geography Division, Statistics Canada, 2006  
Road Network File (RNF), 92-500-XWE/XWF.  
The incorporation of data sources from Statis-  
tics Canada within this product shall not be  
construed as constituting an endorsement by  
Statistics Canada of such product. The use of  
this material is subject to the terms of a Li-  
cense Agreement. You will be held liable for  
any unauthorized copying or disclosure of this  
material.  
!
If liquid or foreign matter should get inside  
this navigation system, park your vehicle to  
safe place and turn the ignition switch off  
(ACC OFF) immediately and consult your deal-  
er or the nearest authorized Pioneer Service  
Station. Do not use the navigation system in  
this condition because doing so may result in  
a fire, electric shock, or other failure.  
!
If you notice smoke, a strange noise or odor  
from the navigation system, or any other ab-  
normal signs on the LCD screen, turn off the  
power immediately and consult your dealer or  
the nearest authorized Pioneer Service Sta-  
tion. Using this navigation system in this con-  
dition may result in permanent damage to the  
system.  
!
!
Do not disassemble or modify this navigation  
system, as there are high-voltage components  
inside which may cause an electric shock. Be  
sure to consult your dealer or the nearest  
authorized Pioneer Service Station for internal  
inspection, adjustments or repairs.  
Do not allow this product to come into contact  
with liquids. Electrical shock could result.  
Also, damage to the product, smoke, and over-  
heating could result from contact with liquids.  
2) As of the Effective Date, the copyright notice  
for all third-party brand icons (the Brand  
Icons) are located in the operators manual  
included in the Licensed Products.  
3) As of the Effective Date, the copyright notice  
with logo for infoUSA, Inc. is:  
Data by  
C
Copyright 2009  
All Rights Reserved  
Powered by NNG  
20  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
only. It may not accurately reflect the latest  
permissible routes, road conditions, one  
way streets, road closures, or traffic restric-  
tions.  
CAUTION  
!
When a route is calculated, the route and  
voice guidance for the route are automatically  
set. Also, for day or time traffic regulations,  
only information about traffic regulations ap-  
plicable at the time when the route was calcu-  
lated is shown. One-way streets and street  
closures may not be taken into consideration.  
For example, if a street is open during the  
morning only, but you arrive later, it would be  
against the traffic regulations so you cannot  
drive along the set route. When driving, please  
follow the actual traffic signs. Also, the system  
may not know some traffic regulations.  
p Traffic restrictions and advisories currently  
in force should always take precedence  
over guidance given by the navigation sys-  
tem. Always obey current traffic restric-  
tions, even if the navigation system  
provides contrary advice.  
p Failure to set correct information about the  
local time may result in the navigation sys-  
tem providing improper routing and gui-  
dance instructions.  
p Never set the volume of your navigation  
system so high that you cannot hear out-  
side traffic and emergency vehicles.  
p To promote safety, certain functions are dis-  
abled unless the vehicle is stopped and/or  
the parking brake is applied.  
p The data encoded in the built-in memory is  
the intellectual property of the provider, and  
the provider is responsible for such con-  
tent.  
Before using your navigation system, be sure  
to read and fully understand the following  
safety information:  
p Read the entire manual before operating  
this navigation system.  
p The navigation features of your navigation  
system (and rear view camera option if pur-  
chased) are intended solely as an aid to  
you in the operation of your vehicle. It is  
not a substitute for your attentiveness,  
judgment, and care when driving.  
p Keep this manual handy as a reference for  
operating procedures and safety informa-  
tion.  
p Do not operate this navigation system (or  
the rear view camera option if purchased) if  
doing so will divert your attention in any  
way from the safe operation of your vehicle.  
Always observe safe driving rules and fol-  
low all existing traffic regulations. If you ex-  
perience difficulty in operating the system  
or reading the display, park your vehicle in  
a safe location and apply the parking brake  
before making the necessary adjustments.  
p Never allow others to use the system un-  
less they have read and understood the op-  
erating instructions.  
p Pay close attention to all warnings in this  
manual and follow the instructions care-  
fully.  
p Do not install this navigation system where  
it may (i) obstruct the drivers vision, (ii) im-  
pair the performance of any of the vehicles  
operating systems or safety features, in-  
cluding air bags or hazard lamp buttons or  
(iii) impair the drivers ability to safely oper-  
ate the vehicle.  
p Please remember to fasten your seat belt at  
all times while operating your vehicle. If  
you are ever in an accident, your injuries  
can be considerably more severe if your  
seat belt is not properly buckled.  
p Never use this navigation system to route  
to hospitals, police stations or similar facil-  
ities in an emergency. Stop using any func-  
tions relating to the hands-free phone and  
please call 911.  
p Never use headphones while driving.  
p Route and guidance information displayed  
by this equipment is for reference purposes  
21  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
GOOG-411service  
p Pioneer does not bear responsibility for the  
accuracy of the information.  
p Pioneer does not bear responsibility for  
changes to information services provided  
by related companies, such as cancellation  
of services or changing to pay-services.  
Also, we do not accept return of the pro-  
duct for this reason.  
WARNING  
!
LIGHT GREEN LEAD AT POWER CON-  
NECTOR IS DESIGNED TO DETECT  
PARKED STATUS AND MUST BE CON-  
NECTED TO THE POWER SUPPLY SIDE  
OF THE PARKING BRAKE SWITCH. IM-  
PROPER CONNECTION OR USE OF  
THIS LEAD MAY VIOLATE APPLICABLE  
LAW AND MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS IN-  
JURY OR DAMAGE.  
!
!
To avoid the risk of damage and injury and the  
potential violation of applicable laws, the navi-  
gation system is not for use with a Video  
imagethat is visible to the driver.  
In some countries or states the viewing of  
Video imageon a display inside a vehicle  
even by persons other than the driver may be  
illegal. Where such regulations apply, they  
must be obeyed.  
Speed limit indication  
The speed limit is based on the map database.  
The speed limit in the database may not  
match the actual speed limit of the current  
road. This is not a definite value. Be sure to  
drive according to the actual speed limit.  
Additional Safety Information  
Parking brake interlock  
!
When applying the parking brake in order to  
view Video imageor to enable other func-  
tions offered by the navigation system, park  
your vehicle in a safe place, and keep the  
brake pedal pushed down before releasing the  
parking brake if the vehicle is parked on a hill  
or otherwise might move when releasing the  
parking brake.  
Certain functions (such as viewing of DVD-  
Video and certain touch key operations) of-  
fered by this navigation system could be dan-  
gerous and/or unlawful if used while driving.  
To prevent such functions from being used  
while the vehicle is in motion, there is an inter-  
lock system that senses when the parking  
brake is set and when the vehicle is moving. If  
you attempt to use the functions described  
above while driving, they will become disabled  
until you stop the vehicle in a safe place, and  
apply the parking brake. Please keep the brake  
pedal pushed down before releasing the park-  
ing brake.  
CAUTION  
Accuracy/performance of interlock may be im-  
pacted by such factors as GPS signal detection  
and driving habits or conditions of the place  
where the vehicle is parked.  
When you attempt to watch Video image”  
while driving, the warning Viewing of front  
seat video source while driving is strictly  
prohibited.will appear on the screen. To  
watch Video imageon this display, stop the  
vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking  
brake. Please keep the brake pedal pushed  
down before releasing the parking brake.  
22  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
or while backing up. Do not use this function  
for entertainment purposes.  
When using a display connected  
to REAR MONITOR OUTPUT  
The video output terminal (REAR MONITOR  
OUTPUT) is for connection of a display to en-  
able passengers in the rear seats to watch  
video images.  
Notes Before Using the System  
Important (Serial Number:)  
The serial number of this device is located on the  
bottom of this product. For your own security and  
convenience, be sure to record this number on  
the enclosed warranty card.  
WARNING  
NEVER install the Rear Display in a location that  
enables the driver to watch video images while  
driving.  
p This cautionary statements apply to AVIC-  
X9115BT.  
Failure to operate  
Should the navigation system fail to operate  
properly, contact your dealer or nearest  
authorized Pioneer Service Station.  
To avoid battery exhaustion  
Be sure to run the vehicle engine while using  
this product. Using this product without run-  
ning the engine can drain the battery.  
After-sales service for Pioneer products  
Please contact the dealer or distributor from  
which you purchased the product for after-  
sales service (including warranty conditions)  
or any other information. In case the necessary  
information is not available, please contact the  
companies listed below.  
WARNING  
Do not use with vehicles that do not feature an  
ACC position.  
Please do not ship your product to the compa-  
nies at the addresses listed below for repair  
without making advance contact.  
Rear view camera  
With an optional rear view camera, you are  
able to use the navigation system as an aid to  
keep an eye on trailers, or backing into a tight  
parking spot.  
!
U.S.A  
Pioneer Electronics (USA) Inc.  
CUSTOMER SUPPORT DIVISION  
P.O. Box 1760 Long Beach, CA 90801-1760  
800-421-1404  
WARNING  
!
CANADA  
!
!
SCREEN IMAGE MAY APPEAR REVERSED.  
USE INPUT ONLY FOR REVERSE OR MIRROR  
IMAGE REAR VIEW CAMERA. OTHER USE  
MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DAMAGE.  
Pioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc.  
CUSTOMER SATISFACTION DEPARTMENT  
300 Allstate Parkway Markham, Ontario  
L3R 0P2  
1-877-283-5901  
CAUTION  
905-479-4411  
!
!
For safety reasons, the rear view camera func-  
tion is not available until the navigation sys-  
tem boots up completely.  
For warranty information, please see the Lim-  
ited Warranty sheet included with your pro-  
duct.  
The rear view mode is to use the navigation  
system as an aid to keep an eye on the trailers,  
23  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
!
!
Buttons on your navigation system are de-  
scribed in ALL CAPITAL, BOLD lettering:  
e.g.)  
MENU button, MAP button.  
Items in different menus, screen titles, and  
functional components are described in  
bold with double quotation marks “ ”:  
e.g.)  
Destination Menuscreen or AV  
Sourcescreen  
Touch panel keys that are available on the  
screen are described in bold in brackets [ ]:  
e.g.)  
Visit Our Web site  
Visit us at the following site:  
http://www.pioneerelectronics.com  
In Canada  
http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca  
1
Register your product. We will keep the details  
of your purchase on file to help you refer to  
this information in the event of an insurance  
claim such as loss or theft.  
2
3
Receive updates on the latest products and  
technologies.  
Download owners manuals, order product  
catalogues, research new products, and  
much more.  
!
!
[Destination], [Settings].  
Extra information, alternatives and other  
notes are presented in the following for-  
mat:  
4
Receive notices of software upgrades and  
software updates.  
e.g.)  
p If the home location has not been stored  
yet, set the location first.  
References are indicated like this:  
e.g.)  
Manual overview  
How to use this manual  
!
Finding the operation procedure for  
what you want to do  
= For details, refer to Setting your home  
When you have decided what you want to do,  
you can find the page you need from the  
Contents.  
Definitions of terminology  
Front Displayand Rear Display”  
Finding the operation procedure from  
a menu name  
If you want to check the meaning of an item  
displayed on the screen, you will find the ne-  
cessary page from the Display informationat  
the end of the manual.  
In this manual, the screen that is attached to  
the body of this navigation unit will be referred  
to as the Front Display. Any additional op-  
tional screen that is purchased for use in con-  
junction with this navigation unit will be  
referred to as the Rear Display.  
Glossary  
Use the glossary to find the meanings of  
terms.  
Video image”  
Video imagein this manual indicates mov-  
ing images of DVD-Video, DivXâ, iPod, and any  
equipment that is connected to this system  
with an RCA cable, such as general-purpose  
AV equipment.  
Terminology  
Before moving on, take a few minutes to read  
the following information about the conven-  
tions used in this manual. Familiarity with  
these conventions will help you greatly as you  
learn how to use your new equipment.  
24  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
External storage device (USB, SD)”  
Notice regarding MP3 file  
usage  
The SD memory card, SDHC memory card  
and USB memory device are collectively re-  
ferred to as the external storage device (USB,  
SD). If it indicates the USB memory only, it is  
referred to as the USB storage device.  
Supply of this navigation system conveys only  
a license for private, non-commercial use and  
does not convey a license nor imply any right  
to use this product in any commercial (i.e. rev-  
enue-generating), real time broadcasting (ter-  
restrial, satellite, cable and/or any other  
media), broadcasting/streaming via internet,  
intranets and/or other networks or in other  
electronic content distribution systems, such  
as pay-audio or audio-on-demand applica-  
tions. An independent license for such use is  
required. For details, please visit  
Notice regarding video  
viewing  
Remember that use of this system for com-  
mercial or public viewing purposes may con-  
stitute an infringement on the authors rights  
as protected by the Copyright Law.  
http://www.mp3licensing.com.  
Notice regarding DVD-  
Video viewing  
This product incorporates copyright protection  
technology that is protected by method claims  
of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual  
property rights owned by Macrovision  
Corporation and other rights owners. Use of  
this copyright protection technology must be  
authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is  
intended for home and other limited viewing  
uses only unless otherwise authorized by  
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering  
or disassembly is prohibited.  
iPod compatibility  
This product supports only the following iPod  
models and iPod software versions. Others  
may not work correctly.  
!
!
!
!
!
!
iPod nano first generation; Ver. 1.3.1  
iPod nano second generation; Ver. 1.1.3  
iPod nano third generation; Ver. 1.1  
iPod fifth generation; Ver. 1.3  
iPod classic; Ver. 1.1.1  
iPod touch; Ver. 1.1.4  
p When you use this navigation system with  
a Pioneer USB interface cable for iPod (CD-  
IU230V) (sold separately), you can control  
an iPod compatible with this navigation  
system.  
p To obtain maximum performance, we re-  
commend that you use the latest software  
for the iPod.  
p Operation methods may vary depending on  
the iPod models and the software version  
of iPod.  
p For more details about iPod compatibility  
with this navigation system, refer to the in-  
formation on our website.  
25  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
p Some data remains. Read Returning the na-  
tings before you operate this function.  
= For more detailed information about the  
items which would be erased, refer to  
Map coverage  
For more details about the map coverage of  
this navigation system, refer to the information  
on our website.  
Protecting the LCD panel  
and screen  
Resetting the microprocessor  
p Do not allow direct sunlight to fall on the  
LCD screen when this product is not being  
used. Extended exposure to direct sunlight  
can result in LCD screen malfunction due  
to the resulting high temperatures.  
p When using a cellular phone, keep the an-  
tenna of the cellular phone away from the  
LCD screen to prevent disruption of the  
video in the form of spots, colored stripes,  
etc.  
CAUTION  
Pressing the RESET button clears the settings for  
the AV source without clearing all the navigation  
function items. Please refer to the related section  
before clearing.  
= For more detailed information about the items  
which would be erased, refer to Returning the  
p To protect the LCD screen from damage, be  
sure to touch the touch panel keys with  
your finger and gently touch the screen.  
The microprocessor must be reset under the  
following conditions:  
!
Prior to using this product for the first time  
after installation.  
!
!
If the product fails to operate properly.  
If there appear to be problems with the op-  
eration of the system.  
When changing the combination of equip-  
ment.  
When adding/removing additional pro-  
ducts that connect to the navigation sys-  
tem.  
Notes on internal memory  
Before removing the vehicle  
battery  
If the battery is disconnected or discharged,  
the memory will be erased and must be repro-  
gramed.  
!
!
p Some data remains. Read Returning the na-  
tings before you operate this function.  
= For more detailed information about the  
items which would be erased, refer to  
!
If your vehicle position is shown on the  
map with a significant positioning error.  
1
Turn the ignition switch OFF.  
Data subject to erasure  
The information is erased by pressing the  
RESET button or disconnecting the yellow lead  
from the battery (or removing the battery it-  
self). However, some items remain.  
26  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
2
Press the RESET button with a pen tip  
or other pointed implement.  
RESET button  
p If you have connected other equipment to  
this navigation system with IP-BUS, be sure  
to reset that equipment too.  
27  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
02  
Basic operation  
4 3  
2
1
5
6
7
8
9
a
Checking part names and functions  
This chapter gives information about the  
names of the parts and the main features  
using the buttons.  
Press and hold the button when the Top  
Menuis displayed. The Screen Calibra-  
tionscreen appears.  
= For details concerning operations, refer  
1 Disc loading slot  
Insert a disc to play.  
= For details concerning operations, refer  
6 MAP button  
Press to view the map screen.  
Press and hold to display the Picture Ad-  
justmentscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer  
2 LCD screen  
3 EJECT button  
4 RESET button  
= For details concerning operations, refer  
7 MULTI-CONTROL  
Rotating;  
Adjusts the AV (Audio and Video) source vo-  
lume.  
Moving upward or downward once;  
Changes the map scale one step at a time.  
5 MENU button  
Press the MENU button to display the Top  
Menu.  
28  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Basic operation  
02  
Keep moving upward or downward;  
Changes the map scale continuously.  
p This operation is available only while the  
map screen is displayed.  
Moving MULTI-CONTROL to the left or  
right;  
Inserting and ejecting a disc  
Inserting a disc  
%
Insert a disc into the disc loading slot.  
Allows you to change the frequency one  
step at a time; operates track search con-  
trols.  
Keep moving MULTI-CONTROL to the  
left or right;  
Allows you to perform manual seek tuning,  
fast forward or reverse.  
Pressing the center of MULTI-CONTROL;  
Enables you to start the voice operation  
when Englishis selected in Program lan-  
guage:. (When a language other than  
Englishis selected, pressing the center al-  
lows you to hear the previous route gui-  
dance.)  
p When your phone is paired to the naviga-  
tion system, press the center of MULTI-  
CONTROL to answer an incoming call or  
end the phone call.  
p Do not insert anything other than a disc  
into the disc loading slot.  
Ejecting a disc  
%
Press the EJECT button.  
The disc is ejected.  
Keep pressing the center of MULTI-CON-  
TROL;  
Mutes the AV (Audio and Video) source. To  
cancel the muting, press and hold it again.  
Inserting and ejecting an  
SD memory card  
CAUTION  
8 Bluetooth connection status indicator  
Lights up when your phone is paired to the  
navigation system by Bluetooth wireless  
technology.  
!
!
!
Keep the dummy SD card out of the reach of  
small children to prevent them from acciden-  
tally swallowing it.  
To prevent data loss and damage to the sto-  
rage device, never remove it from this naviga-  
tion system while data is being transferred.  
If data loss or corruption occurs on the sto-  
rage device for any reason, it is usually not  
possible to recover the data. Pioneer accepts  
no liability for damages, costs or expenses  
arising from data loss or corruption.  
9 AV2input jack  
This is the AV2input terminal. Use the  
CD-RM10 (sold separately) to connect the  
external video component.  
p To connect your iPod by using USB inter-  
face cable for iPod (CD-IU230V), use  
AV1input (RCA) on the back of the  
unit.  
a SD card slot  
= For more detailed information, refer to In-  
29  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
02  
Basic operation  
Inserting an SD memory card  
Plugging and unplugging a  
USB storage device  
%
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
card slot.  
CAUTION  
Insert it with the contact surface facing to the  
left and press the card until it clicks and com-  
pletely locks.  
!
!
To prevent data loss and damage to the sto-  
rage device, never remove it from this naviga-  
tion system while data is being transferred.  
If data loss or corruption occurs on the sto-  
rage device for any reason, it is usually not  
possible to recover the data. Pioneer accepts  
no liability for damages, costs or expenses  
arising from data loss or corruption.  
!
Never remove the USB storage device immedi-  
ately after plugging it. It may cause that the  
navigation system cannot recognize the exter-  
nal storage device (USB, SD).  
p This system is not compatible with Multi  
Media Card (MMC).  
p Compatibility with all SD memory cards is  
not guaranteed.  
Plugging in a USB storage device  
%
Plug a USB storage device into the USB  
p This unit may not achieve optimum perfor-  
mance with some SD memory cards.  
p Do not insert anything other than SD mem-  
ory cards or dummy SD cards into the SD  
card slot.  
connector.  
USB connector  
Ejecting an SD memory card  
1
Press the SD memory card until it clicks.  
The SD memory card is ejected.  
USB storage device  
p Compatibility with all USB storage device is  
not guaranteed.  
This navigation system may not achieve op-  
timum performance with some USB sto-  
rage devices.  
p Connection via USB hub is not possible.  
2
Pull out the SD memory card.  
p Insert the dummy SD card to keep the SD  
card slot free of dust when the SD memory  
card is not inserted.  
Unplugging a USB storage device  
%
Pull out the USB storage device after  
checking that no data is being accessed.  
30  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Basic operation  
02  
Disconnecting your iPod  
Connecting and  
disconnecting an iPod  
%
Pull out the USB interface cable for iPod  
after checking that no data is being ac-  
cessed.  
CAUTION  
!
!
To prevent data loss and damage to the sto-  
rage device, never remove it from this naviga-  
tion system while data is being transferred.  
If data loss or corruption occurs on the sto-  
rage device for any reason, it is usually not  
possible to recover the data. Pioneer accepts  
no liability for damages, costs or expenses  
arising from data loss or corruption.  
Flow from startup to  
termination  
CAUTION  
For safety reasons, the rear view camera function  
is not available until the navigation system boots  
up completely.  
Connecting your iPod  
1
Start the engine to boot up the system.  
Using the USB interface cable for iPod en-  
ables you to connect your iPod to the naviga-  
tion system.  
p A USB interface cable for iPod (CD-IU230V)  
(sold separately) is required for connection.  
After a short pause, the navigation splash  
screen comes on for a few seconds.  
2
Turn off the vehicle engine to termi-  
nate the system.  
The navigation system is also turned off.  
1
Pull out the USB storage device after  
checking that no data is being accessed.  
On first-time startup  
To AV input on the back of the navigation system  
When you use the navigation system for the  
first time, select the language that you want to  
use.  
1
Start the engine to boot up the system.  
After a short pause, the navigation splash  
screen comes on for a few seconds.  
2
Touch the language that you want to  
use on the screen.  
USB connector  
USB interface cable for  
iPod  
p For more details about iPod compatibility  
with this navigation system, refer to the in-  
formation on our website.  
p Connection via USB hub is not possible.  
2
Connect your iPod.  
31  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
02  
Basic operation  
3
Touch the language that you want to  
Regular startup  
use for the voice guidance.  
CAUTION  
For safety reasons, the rear view camera function  
is not available until the navigation system boots  
up completely.  
%
Start the engine to boot up the system.  
After a short pause, the navigation splash  
screen comes on for a few seconds.  
p The screen shown will differ depending on  
the previous conditions.  
p If the navigation screen was shown pre-  
viously, the disclaimer appears.  
The navigation system will now restart.  
Read the disclaimer carefully, checking its  
details, and then touch [OK] if you agree to  
the conditions.  
4
Touch [Destination] to display Destina-  
tion menu.  
p If other screens were shown previously, the  
disclaimer screen will be skipped.  
p If the anti-theft function is activated, you  
must enter your password. After unlocking  
the navigation system, the Top Menuap-  
pears. If you enter the navigation screen  
first, the disclaimer screen will appear.  
Read the disclaimer carefully, checking its  
details, and then touch [OK] if you agree to  
the conditions.  
The disclaimer appears. Read the disclaimer  
carefully, checking its details, and then touch  
[OK] if you agree to the conditions.  
The Destination Menuappears.  
p When the system boots up, the vehicles an-  
tenna may extend or turn on depending on  
the setting. To retract the antenna, turn the  
ignition switch off.  
= For details, refer to Switching the auto an-  
32  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Basic operation  
02  
33  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
02  
Basic operation  
How to use the navigation menu screens  
Screen switching overview  
2
4
3
1
5
6
8
7
34  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Basic operation  
02  
= For details, refer to Setting the rear view  
What you can do on each menu  
1 Top Menu  
Press the MENU button to display the Top  
Menu.  
This is the starting menu to access the desired  
screens and operate the various functions.  
2 Destination Menu  
1
Press the MENU button to display the  
Top Menu, and then touch [Settings].  
2
Touch [System Settings] and then touch  
[Back Camera].  
You can search for your destination on this  
menu. You can also check or cancel your set  
route from this menu.  
3
Touch [On] next to Camerato acti-  
vate the camera setting.  
p [MSN Direct] is available for AVIC-  
X9115BT only.  
3 Contacts screen  
4
Press the MENU button to display the  
Top Menuand then touch [AV Source].  
You can access the list of contacts to call up  
an entry.  
= For details, refer to Using hands-free  
phoning.  
5
Touch [RearView] on the AV Source”  
menu.  
4 AV Source menu  
You can access the screen for selecting the  
audio and visual source to play.  
5 Phone Menu  
You can access the screen that is related to  
hands-free phoning to see call histories and  
change the settings on the Bluetooth wireless  
technology connection.  
6 Settings Menu  
You can access the screen to customize set-  
tings.  
7 Map screen  
Press the MAP button to display the naviga-  
tion map screen.  
8 AV operation screen  
This is the screen that normally appears when  
you play the AV source. Touching the icon on  
the top left corner displays the AV Source”  
menu.  
p To return to the previous screen, touch  
.
Displaying the rear view  
camera image  
[RearView] can be displayed the full-screen  
rear view camera image. [RearView] is useful  
if you want to monitor an attached trailer, etc.  
35  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
02  
Basic operation  
How to use the map  
Most of the information provided by your navigation system can be seen on the map. You need to be-  
come familiar with how information appears on the map.  
How to read the map screen  
This example shows an example of a 2D map screen.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
h
g
f
9
a
e
d
c
b
p Information with the mark (*) appears only  
when the route is set.  
5 Compass  
The red arrow indicates north.  
p Depending on the conditions and settings,  
some items may not be displayed.  
1 Next direction of travel*  
6 Map mode selector  
= For details, refer to Switching the map  
When you approach a guidance point, this ap-  
pears in green. Touching this item enables  
you to hear the previous guidance again.  
p For more information about the direc-  
tion symbol, refer to Supplemental infor-  
2 Distance to the guidance point*  
Shows the distance to the next guidance  
point.  
7 Shortcut to the  
Map Confirmation Screen”  
Touching this shortcut enables the screen to  
switch to the Map Confirmation Screendi-  
rectly with the current position or the cursor  
position centered.  
= For details, refer to What you can do with  
3 Name of the street to be used (or next gui-  
dance point)*  
8 Stop key for the dummy run  
4 Current time  
36  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Basic operation  
02  
This key will be displayed while you activate  
the dummy run (Fly overor Demo  
Mode). Touch the key to cancel the dummy  
run.  
= For details, refer to Demo Mode on  
= For details, refer to Map Settings on  
p The estimated time of arrival is an ideal  
value that the navigation system com-  
putes internally as the route is calcu-  
lated. The estimated time of arrival  
should be read just as a reference value,  
and does not guarantee arrival at the  
time indicated.  
= For details, refer to Playing simulated tra-  
9 Album artwork on iPod  
If you connect your iPod to this navigation sys-  
tem, the artwork for the album that is playing  
appears.  
g Map scale  
The scale of the map is indicated by distance.  
h Second Maneuver Arrow*  
Shows the turning direction after next and the  
distance to there.  
a Shortcut to the AV operation screen  
The AV Source currently selected is shown.  
Touching the indicator displays the AV opera-  
tion screen of the current source directly.  
b Extension tab for the AV information bar  
Touching this tab opens the AV information  
bar and enables you to briefly view the current  
status on the AV source. Touching it again re-  
tracts the bar.  
p This item is not shown when Full  
Screen Mapis set to On.  
= For details, refer to Map Settings on  
Meaning of guidance flags  
: Destination  
The checkered flag indicates your  
destination.  
c Current route*  
The route currently set is highlighted in bright  
color on the map. If a waypoint is set on the  
route, the route after the next waypoint is  
highlighted in another color.  
: Waypoint  
The yellow flags indicate your way-  
points.  
d Current position  
: Start point  
The bright green flag indicates  
your start point.  
Indicates the current location of your vehicle.  
The apex of the triangular mark indicates your  
orientation and the display moves automati-  
cally as you drive.  
p The apex of the triangular mark is the  
proper current position.  
Signpost and recommended lane  
Signposts will appear together with the recom-  
mended lane where multi-lane roads exist  
when you are driving on your route. The high-  
lighted lane indicates the recommended lane.  
e Street name (or city name) that your vehi-  
cle is traveling along  
f Multi-Info window  
Shows the value on the items selected on  
Displayed Info. Touching this area allows  
you to display the Route Information”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displayed Info on  
= For details, refer to Checking the current  
p This item is not shown when Full  
Screen Mapis set to On.  
37  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
02  
Basic operation  
p This information is based on the map data-  
base. Thus, the information may differ from  
actual conditions. Use it as just a direc-  
tional reference for your driving.  
When Heading upmode is selected,  
displayed.  
is  
2D map screen (North up mode)  
Note regarding the route highlighted  
in purple  
p A route highlighted in purple on the map  
indicates that your route includes a road  
not matching your preference on the fol-  
lowing settings in Route; Unpaved  
Roads, Highways, Ferries, U-turns,  
Permit Needed, Toll Roads.  
For your safety, please review and obey all  
local traffic rules along the highlighted  
route.  
The map display always has north at the top of  
the screen.  
When North upmode is selected,  
is dis-  
played.  
3D map screen  
Switching the map mode  
There are a number of map displays.  
Touching the map mode selector allows you to  
change the map display.  
When the 3D map screen is selected,  
displayed.  
is  
1
Press the MAP button to display the na-  
Map mode selector  
vigation map screen.  
2D map screen (Heading up mode)  
2
Touch the map mode selector to switch  
the map display.  
Each touch of the map mode selector changes  
the map display as follows:  
2D map screen (Heading up mode) 2D map  
screen (North up mode) 3D map screen  
Changing the scale of the map  
1
Press the MAP button to display the na-  
The map display always shows the vehicles di-  
rection as proceeding toward the top of the  
screen.  
vigation map screen.  
38  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Basic operation  
02  
2
Move MULTI-CONTROL down or up to  
3
Touch the map briefly.  
zoom in or out.  
Briefly touching the position on the map that  
you want to see positions the cursor there.  
Moving MULTI-CONTROL upward or down-  
ward once allows you to change the map  
scale one step at a time. Holding MULTI-CON-  
TROL while moving it up or down allows you  
to change the scale sequentially.  
Cursor  
Positioning the cursor to the desired location  
results in a brief informational overview about  
the location being displayed at the bottom of  
screen, with street name and other informa-  
tion for this location being shown. (The infor-  
mation shown varies depending on the  
position.)  
4
Touch and drag the map in the desired  
direction to scroll.  
Dragging the map scrolls it. The scrolling in-  
crement depends on your dragging length.  
p Pressing the MAP button returns the map  
to the current position.  
p Zooming out will reduce the size of the icon  
and further zooming out will hide it. How-  
ever, the pin-shaped icon is not resized and  
keeps displayed.  
p Further zooming out hides the lines of traf-  
fic information.  
Changing the tilt and rotation  
angle of the map  
On the 3D map screen, briefly touching the  
map shows the tilt controls and rotation angle.  
1
Press the MAP button to display the na-  
vigation map screen.  
Scrolling the map to the  
position you want to see  
2
Switch to the 3D map screen.  
= For details, refer to Switching the map mode  
1
Press the MAP button to display the na-  
vigation map screen.  
2
Switch to the 2D map screen.  
= For details, refer to Switching the map mode  
39  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
02  
Basic operation  
3
Touch anywhere on the map briefly to  
The basic flow of creating  
your route  
show the tilt controls and rotation angle.  
1 Park your vehicle in a safe place, and apply  
the parking brake.  
j
2 Display the Destination Menu.  
j
3 Select the method of searching for your  
destination.  
Controls for tilt and rotation angle  
j
p Touching  
hides the tilt controls and rota-  
4 Enter information about the destination  
and narrow down candidates to one.  
tion angle.  
4
Touch the controls to adjust the tilt and  
j
rotation angle.  
5 Touch [Go Here Now] on the Map Confir-  
mation Screen.  
j
6 The navigation system calculates the route  
to your destination, and then shows the  
route on the map.  
j
7 After releasing the parking brake, drive in  
accordance with navigation guidance.  
Operating list screens (e.g.  
city list)  
2
3
1
4
5
1 Screen title  
The screen title appears.  
40  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Basic operation  
02  
2 Current page/total pages  
3
Each touch of [aA] changes the setting as fol-  
lows:  
Returns the previous screen.  
4
enables you to capitalize the first  
letter of a word.  
Touching or on the scroll bar scrolls  
through the list and allows you to view the re-  
maining items.  
enables you to enter letters in  
lower-case. (When a space is entered, it  
switches  
automatically.)  
5 Listed items  
enables you to enter letters with  
Touching an item on the list allows you to nar-  
row down the options and proceed to the next  
operation.  
capitals (caps) lock.  
8 [@/!]:  
Displays the key to enter special characters,  
such as [!].  
p The appearance of this key and typeable  
characters change according to the cur-  
rent keyboard layout.  
Operating the on-screen  
keyboard  
1
2
3
4
5
6
9 [Keys]  
Switches the on-screen keyboard layout.  
a [Done]  
Confirms the entry and allows you to proceed  
to the next step.  
7
8
9
a
1 Text box  
Displays the characters that are entered. If  
there is no text in the box, an informative  
guide with text appears.  
2 Screen title  
The screen title appears.  
3 Keyboard  
Touch the keys to enter the characters.  
4 Number of possible choices  
5
Returns the previous screen.  
6
:
Deletes the input text one letter at a time, be-  
ginning at the end of the text. Continuing to  
touch the button deletes all of the text.  
7 Caps lock control  
Switches the keyboard between lowercase let-  
ters and uppercase letters.  
41  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
03  
Searching for and selecting a location  
2
Touch [Address].  
CAUTION  
For safety reasons, these route-setting functions  
are not available while your vehicle is in motion.  
To enable these functions, you must stop in a  
safe place and put on the parking brake before  
setting your route.  
p Some information regarding traffic regula-  
tions depends on the time when the route  
calculation is performed. Thus, the infor-  
mation may not correspond with a certain  
traffic regulation when your vehicle actually  
passes through the location in question.  
Also, the information on the traffic regula-  
tions provided will be for a passenger vehi-  
cle, and not for a truck or other delivery  
vehicles. Always follow the actual traffic  
regulations when driving.  
3
Touch the key next to Country:to dis-  
play the country list.  
Searching for a location by  
address  
The most frequently used function is [Ad-  
dress], in which the address is specified and  
the destination is searched.  
4
Touch one of the items on the list to set  
the country as search area.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu.  
The screen returns to the previous screen.  
42  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Searching for and selecting a location  
03  
5
Touch the key next to State:and  
8
Touch the desired city name.  
touch the desired state, province, or terri-  
tory on the list.  
!
When a city is already set, touching [City  
Center] allows you to select the representa-  
tive location of the city and proceed to the  
Map Confirmation Screen.  
The screen returns to the previous screen.  
6
Touch the key next to City:to enter  
the city name.  
9
Enter the street name and touch the de-  
sired one from the list.  
!
When a street is already set, touching  
[Street Center] allows you to select the re-  
presentative point of the street and proceed  
to the Map Confirmation Screen.  
!
When a street is already set, touching [In-  
tersection] allows you to search for an in-  
tersection. After entering the second street  
name and selecting the desired intersec-  
tion, the Map Confirmation Screenap-  
pears. This is useful when you dont know  
the house number or cannot input the  
house number of the selected street.  
7
Enter the city name or Zip code.  
10 Enter the house number and then  
touch [Done].  
!
If the house number you have entered is  
not found, a message appears. In that case,  
a house number near entered one is se-  
lected after touching [OK].  
!
!
When the options are narrowed down to six  
or less, those are automatically listed.  
If you want to list the options matching to  
the current information entered, touch  
[Done].  
!
Touching [History] displays the list of cities  
that you selected before.  
43  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
03  
Searching for and selecting a location  
11 Touch one of the options at the bottom  
of the Map Confirmation Screento select  
the next operation.  
2
Touch [Around Cursor].  
3
Drag the map to move the cursor to the  
desired position and touch [OK].  
Touch [Route...] then [Go Here Now] to set  
your selected position as your destination and  
calculate the route up that point.  
= For details of other operations on the  
Map Confirmation Screen, refer to What  
If only one option is appropriate for your entry,  
the screen will jump to the  
Map Confirmation Screendirectly and the pro-  
cess of entering the street name or house num-  
ber will be skipped. If you do not want that  
The number of nearby POIs will appear at the  
bottom of the screen.  
4
Touch the category you want.  
location, touch  
dress.  
to retry with another ad-  
Searching for the vicinity  
Points of Interest (POI)  
Information about various facilities (Points Of  
Interest - POI), such as gas stations, parking  
lots or restaurants, is available. You can  
search for a POI by selecting the category (or  
entering the POI Name).  
If there are more detailed categories within the  
selected category, repeat this step as many  
times as necessary.  
Searching for POIs around the  
cursor  
Touch [Search] to search for a POI by entering  
the POI name in the selected category.  
Touching [All] lists all POIs that are included  
in the categories currently displayed.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [POI].  
44  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Searching for and selecting a location  
03  
5
Touch the POI you want.  
Searching for a nearby POI  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [POI].  
2
Touch [Around Current GPS Location].  
The list of POI categories appears.  
= For the subsequent operations, refer to  
!
!
Touching the [Name] tab sorts the options  
in the list in alphabetical order.  
Touching the [Distance] tab sorts the op-  
tions in the list in order by distance.  
Searching for POIs along the  
current route  
p This function is available when the route is  
set.  
p Icons are helpful for quickly telling the cate-  
gory of facilities with the same name.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [POI].  
6
Touch one of the options at the bottom  
of the Map Confirmation Screento select  
the next operation.  
2
Touch [Along Route].  
The list of POI categories appears.  
= For the subsequent operations, refer to  
Searching for POIs around the  
destination  
p This function is available when the route is  
set.  
Touch [Route...] then [Go Here Now] to set  
your selected position as your destination and  
calculate the route up that point.  
= For details of other operations on the  
Map Confirmation Screen, refer to What  
p Searching for a spot and touching [Info] on  
the Map Confirmation Screenalso allows  
you to search for nearby POIs around the  
cursor.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [POI].  
2
Touch [Around Destination].  
The list of POI categories appears.  
= For the subsequent operations, refer to  
Searching for POIs around the  
address  
= For details, refer to Viewing information  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [POI].  
2
Touch [Around entered address].  
45  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
03  
Searching for and selecting a location  
3
4
Enter the address you want.  
= For details, refer to Searching for a location  
4
Touch the search method that you  
want to put into memory.  
Touch the category you want.  
= For the subsequent operations, refer to  
Using Saved Criteria”  
Storing your selection sequence  
The list of POI categories appears.  
You can store the selected search method and  
one of the categories as a shortcut to recall it  
later. It allows you to search for a POI in the  
same way as you did before. You can also de-  
lete the shortcuts.  
5
Touch the category that you want to  
put into memory.  
If there are more detailed categories within the  
selected category, select the desired category  
from the list repeatedly until your desired cate-  
gory appears.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [POI].  
2 Touch [Register Search Criteria].  
Your selection sequence is shown on the top  
of the screen.  
3
Touch one of the items on the list.  
6
Recheck the sequence and touch [Save  
Criteria] to put it into memory.  
!
Selecting an item that has already been  
stored allows you to overwrite it.  
46  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Searching for and selecting a location  
03  
!
Touching [Save Criteria] without selecting  
a category allows you to store only your se-  
lected search method including all cate-  
gories.  
4
Touch the POI you want.  
!
If there arent any more detailed categories,  
a blank list appears. In that case, touching  
[Save Criteria] allows you to store it as the  
currently selected category. Check the cur-  
rent sequence at the top of the screen.  
7
Enter the name and then touch [Done]  
to complete the entry.  
5
Touch one of the options at the bottom  
of the Map Confirmation Screento select  
the next operation.  
The storing process is complete and the short-  
cut is available on Saved Criteria.  
Touch [Route...] then [Go Here Now] to set  
your selected position as your destination and  
calculate the route up that point.  
Searching for POIs by using the  
memorized sequence  
= For details of other operations on the  
Map Confirmation Screen, refer to What  
You can search for POIs with using the pre-  
stored shortcut.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [POI].  
Deleting memorized sequence  
2
3
Touch [Saved Criteria].  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
Touch one of the items on the list.  
and then touch [POI].  
2
Touch [Saved Criteria].  
47  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
03  
Searching for and selecting a location  
3
Touch [Delete] on the right of the item  
4
5
6
Touch the folder you want on the list.  
Touch one of the items on the list.  
Touch one of the options at the bottom  
that you want to delete.  
Searching for POIs by using  
the data on external  
storage devices (USB, SD)  
Creating a customized POI is possible by  
using the utility program AVIC FEEDSwhich  
is available separately, on your PC. (AVIC  
FEEDSwill be available on our website.) Stor-  
ing the customized POI properly and connect-  
ing the external storage device (USB, SD)  
enables the system to use the data for  
searches.  
of the Map Confirmation Screento select  
the next operation.  
1
Connect the USB device or insert the SD  
card.  
2
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [USB/SD].  
3
Touch the storage that you want to  
load from.  
Touch [Route...] then [Go Here Now] to set  
your selected position as your destination and  
calculate the route up that point.  
= For details of other operations on the  
Map Confirmation Screen, refer to What  
48  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Searching for and selecting a location  
03  
4
Touch  
to delete the current value  
Searching for a location by  
coordinates  
and enter the desired coordinate.  
Entering a latitude and longitude pinpoints  
the location.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [Route Function].  
!
Touching [N/S] or [E/W] changes the hemi-  
sphere.  
5
Touch [Done].  
The screen returns to the previous screen.  
Touch the other key that you have not entered  
yet, enter the latitude or longitude and then  
touch [Done] to finish the entry.  
2
Touch [Coordinate].  
6
Touch [OK].  
3
Touch either the latitude key or the  
longitude key, whichever you want to  
enter.  
The Map Confirmation Screenappears.  
Touch one of the options at the bottom  
7
of the Map Confirmation Screento select  
the next operation.  
The values on the latitude key or longitude key  
shows the coordinates on the cursor just be-  
fore entering this screen.  
49  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
03  
Searching for and selecting a location  
Touch [Route...] then [Go Here Now] to set  
your selected position as your destination and  
calculate the route up that point.  
= For details of other operations on the  
Map Confirmation Screen, refer to What  
Touch [Route...] then [Go Here Now] to set  
your selected position as your destination and  
calculate the route up that point.  
= For details of other operations on the  
Map Confirmation Screen, refer to What  
Deleting an entry in History”  
Items in Historycan be deleted. All entries  
in Historycan also be deleted at once.  
Selecting a location you  
searched for recently  
The places that you have searched for in the  
past are automatically stored in History.  
Selecting an item from the list provides an  
easy way to specify the position.  
p Historycan store up to 32 locations. If  
the entries reach the maximum, the new  
entry overwrites the oldest one.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [History].  
2
Touch [Delete] on the right of the item  
that you want to delete.  
3
Touch [Yes].  
A message will appear asking you to confirm  
the deletion.  
p Touching [Clear History] allows you to de-  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [History].  
lete all the entries.  
2
Touch the entry you want.  
p Because deleted data cannot be restored,  
take extra care not to mistakenly delete  
items.  
Selecting a location stored  
in Favorites”  
Storing locations you visit frequently saves  
time and effort.  
Selecting an item from the list provides an  
easy way to specify the position.  
p Favoritescan store up to 30 locations.  
3
Touch one of the options at the bottom  
of the Map Confirmation Screento select  
the next operation.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [Favorites].  
50  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Searching for and selecting a location  
03  
2
Touch the entry you want.  
3
Touch [Yes].  
p Because deleted data cannot be restored,  
take extra care not to mistakenly delete  
items.  
Setting up a route to your  
home  
If your home location is stored, the route  
home can be calculated by touching a single  
key.  
3
Touch one of the options at the bottom  
of the Map Confirmation Screento select  
the next operation.  
%
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [Return Home].  
When the route is not set, route calculation  
starts immediately.  
When a route has already been set, a message  
will appear asking you to cancel it. Touch [Yes]  
to start the route calculation.  
p If the home location has not been stored  
yet, set the location first.  
= For details, refer to Setting your home po-  
Touch [Route...] then [Go Here Now] to set  
your selected position as your destination and  
calculate the route up that point.  
= For details of other operations on the  
Map Confirmation Screen, refer to What  
Setting a route by recalling  
a saved route  
Saving a route enables you to recall the same  
route. Selecting a saved item from a list is an  
easy way to set a saved route.  
Selecting an item from the list provides an  
easy way to specify the position.  
Deleting an entry in Favorites”  
All entries in Favoritescan be deleted at  
once.  
!
If there are no entries on the list, save a  
route first.  
= For details concerning other operations,  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [Favorites].  
2
Touch [Clear All].  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
A message will appear asking you to confirm  
the deletion.  
and then touch [Saved Routes].  
51  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
03  
Searching for and selecting a location  
2
Touch the entry you want.  
4
Touch one of the options at the bottom  
of the Map Confirmation Screento select  
the next operation.  
If no route has been set yet, the saved route is  
recalled and the guidance will start im-  
mediately.  
Touch [Route...] then [Go Here Now] to set  
your selected position as your destination and  
calculate the route up that point.  
= For details of other operations on the  
Map Confirmation Screen, refer to What  
Searching for a location by  
scrolling the map  
Specifying a location after scrolling the map  
enables you to set the position as an operable  
target in the Map Confirmation Screen.  
1
Press the MAP button to display the na-  
vigation map screen.  
2
Touch and drag the screen to scroll the  
map to the position you want.  
3
Touch  
to display the  
Map Confirmation Screen.  
The Map Confirmation Screenappears.  
52  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Searching for and selecting a location  
03  
53  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
04  
After the location is decided (Map Confirmation Screen)  
What you can do with the Map Confirmation Screen”  
Under most conditions after searching for a location, the Map Confirmation Screenappears, so you  
can select the next operation. The options shown below are available on this screen:  
Map  
Route...  
Shows a full-screen 2D map centered on the  
cursor position.  
Save as...  
Places a map pin, and saves the position.  
= For more details of the operation, refer to  
Route...  
Sets the destination, waypoints, and starting  
point positions.  
= For more details of the operation, refer to  
Go Here Now  
Calculates the new route by setting the cursor  
position as the new destination.  
= For more details of the operation, refer to  
Info  
Shows detailed information about the location  
of the cursor position.  
= For more details of the operation, refer to  
Add Via  
Recalculates the route by adding the cursor  
position as a waypoint.  
= For more details of the operation, refer to  
Call  
Enables you to call the POI that has a tele-  
phone number. (Pairing with cellular phone  
featuring Bluetooth wireless technology is re-  
quired.)  
= For more details of the operation, refer to  
Continue  
Recalculates the route by setting the cursor  
position as the new destination. The previous  
destination becomes a waypoint.  
54  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
After the location is decided (Map Confirmation Screen)  
04  
= For more details of the operation, refer to  
2
Touch [Go Here Now].  
When the route is not set, route calculation  
starts immediately.  
When a route has already been set, a message  
will appear asking you to cancel it. Touch [Yes]  
to start the route calculation.  
p When the cursor overlaps with a destina-  
tion that has already been set, touch [Re-  
move Dest.] to cancel the current route or  
recalculate the route by setting one of the  
remaining waypoints as the destination.  
Starting Point  
Sets the location as a starting point.  
= For more details of the operation, refer to  
Save as...  
Setting the location as a  
waypoint  
1
Touch [Route...] on the  
Map Confirmation Screen.  
2
Touch [Add Via].  
p When the cursor overlaps a waypoint al-  
ready set, touch [Remove Via] to delete the  
waypoint and recalculate the route.  
Add Pin  
Puts a map pin at the cursor position as a  
mark up.  
= For details, refer to Placing a map pin on the  
Replacing the location as  
the new final destination  
Add POI  
1
Touch [Route...] on the  
Stores the cursor position as a POI.  
= For details, refer to Registering the location  
Map Confirmation Screen.  
2
Touch [Continue].  
p Recalculates the route by setting the cursor  
position as the new destination. The pre-  
vious destination becomes a waypoint.  
Add Favorite  
Stores the cursor position as one of the Fa-  
vorites.  
= For details, refer to Storing the location in  
Setting the location as the  
start point  
When there is no route, only the starting point  
can be set. Otherwise, the new route from the  
starting point to the current destination will be  
recalculated.  
Setting the location as a  
new destination  
1
Touch [Route...] on the  
Map Confirmation Screen.  
1
Touch [Route...] on the  
Map Confirmation Screen.  
55  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
04  
After the location is decided (Map Confirmation Screen)  
2
Touch [Starting Point].  
1
p When the cursor overlaps with a starting  
point already set, it changes to [Remove  
Start]. All waypoints already set are  
deleted.  
Viewing information about  
a specified location  
Locating the cursor to your desired position  
enables you to view detailed information about  
the location by using the  
2
1 The address and coordinates  
2 Information about a nearby POI  
p Up to 300 nearby POIs will be listed.  
Map Confirmation Screen.  
1
Press the MAP button to display the na-  
5
Touch or to scroll the nearby POI list  
vigation map screen.  
and then touch the desired POI.  
Touching one of the listed POIs enables you to  
view more detailed information about the POI.  
2
Touch and drag the screen to scroll the  
map to the position you want.  
6
Touch [OK].  
If you touch [OK], the  
Map Confirmation Screenappears with a  
focus on the selected POI.  
Placing a map pin on the  
location  
The pin-shaped icons called map pinscan  
be used just like markers. Placing the colored  
pins on the map makes the position stand out  
and helps you to find the position easily later.  
3
Touch  
to display the  
Map Confirmation Screen.  
The Map Confirmation Screenappears.  
4
Touch [Info] at the bottom of the  
Map Confirmation Screen.  
The Point Infoscreen appears.  
56  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
After the location is decided (Map Confirmation Screen)  
04  
1
Search for a location or position the  
4
Touch the desired category to which  
cursor on the desired area by scrolling the  
map and displaying the  
the location is to be assigned.  
Map Confirmation Screen.  
2
Touch [Save as...] on the  
Map Confirmation Screen.  
3
Touch [Add Pin].  
The pin icon is placed on the map and the  
screen returns to the map screen.  
p The color of the pin icon is assigned auto-  
matically within predefined colors when  
you set it up.  
If there are more detailed categories within the  
selected category, repeat this step as many  
times as necessary.  
Removing a map pin  
When the cursor overlaps a map pin that has  
already been set, you can remove the map pin.  
5
Touch [Add here] when the desired ca-  
tegory list appears to add the item to it.  
If there arent any more detailed categories,  
the blank list appears. In such case, touching  
[Add here] allows you to add the item and  
register it as an item belonging to the category  
that you selected on the previous screen.  
p Touching [Add here] without selecting any  
category is invalid.  
1
Locate the cursor at the pin icon and  
display the Map Confirmation Screen.  
2
Touch [Save as...] on the  
Map Confirmation Screen.  
3
Touch [Remove Pins].  
6
Enter the name and then touch [Done]  
The pin icon is removed and the screen re-  
turns to the map screen.  
to complete the entry.  
Registering the location as  
a customized POI  
If a new business has opened, it may not be  
found in the database. Registering the loca-  
tion as a new POI allows you to use the item  
just like a preinstalled POI.  
1
Search for a location or position the  
The registration is now complete and the item  
is available as a customized POI.  
p You can edit the stored POI later in POI  
Settings.  
cursor on the desired area by scrolling the  
map and displaying the  
Map Confirmation Screen.  
= For more details of the operation, refer to  
2
Touch [Save as...] on the  
Map Confirmation Screen.  
3
Touch [Add POI].  
The list of POI categories appears.  
57  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
04  
After the location is decided (Map Confirmation Screen)  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
Storing the location in  
Favorites”  
and then touch [Favorites].  
2
Touch [Clear All].  
Storing your favorite locations as Favorites”  
provides you with the opportunity to save the  
time and effort of re-entering this information.  
Stored items can be made available on Fa-  
voriteslater.  
= For more details of the operation, refer to  
A message will appear asking you to confirm  
the deletion.  
3
Touch [Yes].  
p Because deleted data cannot be restored,  
take extra care not to mistakenly delete  
items.  
p Favoritescan store up to 30 locations.  
1
Search for a location or position the  
cursor on the desired area by scrolling the  
map and displaying the  
Map Confirmation Screen.  
2
Touch [Save as...] on the  
Map Confirmation Screen.  
3
4
Touch [Add Favorite].  
Touch the entry you want.  
Selecting an item that has already been stored  
allows you to overwrite it.  
5
Enter the name and then touch [Done]  
to complete the entry.  
Storage is complete and the item is available  
as a preset entry on Favorites.  
Deleting an entry in  
Favorites”  
All entries in Favoritescan be deleted at  
once.  
58  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Checking the current route  
05  
Checking the current route  
conditions  
1
2
3
4
The Route Informationscreen provides you  
with various detailed information about the  
current route.  
This is an example showing a route with two  
waypoints.  
5
p This function is available only when the  
route is set and your vehicle position is on  
the route.  
6
p You can also display the Route Informa-  
tionscreen by touching Multi-Info win-  
dowon the map screen.  
7
8
= For details, refer to Multi-Info window  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [Route Function].  
1 Starting point  
2 Current position  
3 Waypoint  
2
Touch [Route info].  
4 Destination  
5 Time and distance up to the point currently  
shown  
The remaining distance and time, as well as  
the estimated time of arrival are displayed.  
6 Method:is the route calculation method  
that is currently set  
= For details, refer to Route on page 148.  
7 Point currently shown and information re-  
garding the point  
The Route Informationscreen appears.  
8 The route conditions up to the point cur-  
rently shown  
Touching the icon enables you to check the  
details. If there are five or more icons, touch  
to show the next four icons.  
59  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
05  
Checking the current route  
3
Touch [Dest.] to switch to the first way-  
Checking the entire route  
overview on the map  
point screen.  
You can check the entire outline of the current  
route.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [Route Function].  
2
Touch [Route info].  
The Route Informationscreen appears.  
3
Touch [Fit to Screen].  
A 2D map screen will appear with the current  
overall route fitted onto the screen.  
The Route Information (to via)screen ap-  
pears.  
4
Touch [Via] to switch to the second  
waypoint screen.  
The Route Information (to via)screen for  
next waypoint appears.  
Checking the current itinerary  
You can check the route details.  
p This function is available only when the  
route is set and your vehicle position is on  
the route.  
5
Touch [Via] to return to the screen for  
whole route.  
The Route Informationscreen appears.  
p If three or more waypoints are set, each  
touch of [Via] shows the screen for the next  
waypoint.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [Route Function].  
2
3
Touch [Itinerary].  
Touch or to scroll the list.  
Playing simulated travel at  
high speed  
Scroll the list as necessary.  
This function allows you to play the simulated  
navigation function at high speed without  
voice guidance. This function is useful if you  
want to browse how the current route will be  
navigated.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [Route Function].  
1
3
2
Touch [Route info].  
The Route Informationscreen appears.  
1 Turning direction  
2 Driving distance  
3
Touch [Fly over].  
3 Names of the streets you are driving  
through  
The simulation will start.  
p If you want to stop the simulation, touch  
on the map.  
4
Touch [Mode].  
Each touch of [Mode] changes the list mode.  
60  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Checking the current route  
05  
Alternative options:  
!
!
!
Detailed Instructions  
All turning points, passed streets and other  
information is shown.  
Instructions  
All turning points (where voice guidance is  
given) are shown.  
Road List  
Displays the turning points in the most sim-  
plified form (duplicated route names are  
merged into one).  
p When a long distance route is calculated,  
your navigation system may not be able to  
list all roads. (In this case, the remaining  
roads will be shown in the list as you drive  
on.)  
61  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
06  
Editing waypoints and the destination  
Touching [Optimize] sorts the waypoints auto-  
matically so that the route will compromise  
the least time and distance.  
Editing waypoints  
You can edit waypoints (locations you want to  
visit on the way to your destination) and recal-  
culate the route so that is passes through  
these locations.  
4
Touch [Done].  
The route is recalculated and the map of the  
current position appears.  
Adding a waypoint  
Deleting a waypoint  
1
Search for a location.  
You can delete waypoints from the route and  
then recalculate the route. (You can delete  
waypoints successively.)  
= For more details, refer to the descriptions  
from page 42 to page 52.  
2
Touch [Route...] on the  
Map Confirmation Screen.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [Route Function].  
3
Touch [Add Via].  
= For more details of the operation, refer to  
2
Touch [Edit Route].  
The Edit Routescreen appears.  
p When you set waypoints in the route to your  
destination, the route up to the next way-  
point will appear in light green. The rest of  
the route will appear in light blue.  
3
Touch [Delete] on the right of the way-  
point that you want to delete.  
The waypoint will be deleted from the list.  
4
Touch [Done].  
The route is recalculated and the map of the  
current position appears.  
Sorting waypoints  
You can sort waypoints and recalculate the  
route.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
Storing the current route  
Storing the current route allows you to recall  
and then touch [Route Function].  
and set the stored route.  
2
Touch [Edit Route].  
p This function is available only when the  
route is set and your vehicle position is on  
the route.  
The Edit Routescreen appears.  
3
Touch [i] or [j] to move the waypoint  
or destination.  
Put them in the desired order.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [Route Function].  
2
Touch [Save Route].  
62  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Editing waypoints and the destination  
06  
3
Enter the name and then touch [Done]  
to complete the entry.  
The previous screen appears.  
p Saved route can be recalled later.  
= For details, refer to Setting a route by recal-  
Deleting the entry in Saved  
Routes”  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [Saved Routes].  
2
Touch [Delete] on the right of the item  
that you want to delete.  
p Because deleted data cannot be restored,  
take extra care not to mistakenly delete  
items.  
Deleting the current route  
If you no longer need to travel to your destina-  
tion, follow the steps below to delete the cur-  
rent route and cancel the route guidance.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [Delete Route].  
A message confirming the cancellation of the  
current route appears.  
2
Touch [Yes].  
63  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
07  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
If you have an active subscription to  
General flow chart:  
MSN Direct service, you can check and  
browse various information on your navigation  
system, such as gas prices, movie times,  
weather conditions and traffic information.  
The information will be updated periodically.  
This function is available for AVIC-X9115BT  
only.  
1 Check your product key.  
You have to know your product key for the  
subscription.  
j
2 Make an online subscription to MSN Direct  
service using your PC.  
j
To receive MSNâ Direct on an MSN Direct-ready  
device, you must be within an MSN Direct cover-  
age area; see http://www.msndirect.com/pioneer  
for current coverage maps. Coverage areas are af-  
fected by reception limitations of the FM network  
as well as other factors, which may affect the  
ability to receive FM broadcasts. Coverage areas  
are subject to change. Not all content is available  
in all coverage areas.  
3 Activate the MSN Direct service on this pro-  
duct.  
j
4 Activation is complete.  
© 2009 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.  
Microsoft, MSN, and the MSN logo are trade-  
marks of the Microsoft group of companies.  
Checking your product key  
The product key that you can find here is used  
in the online subscription.  
Notice about MSN Direct  
Pioneer is not responsible for the accuracy of the  
MSN Direct content. The MSN Direct content  
may not be current or available at times, and is  
subject to change without notice.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
The MSN Directscreen appears.  
2
Touch [Status].  
Activating the service  
You have to activate MSN Direct first.  
p A web-connected computer is required for  
the online subscription.  
3
Write your product key down in the fol-  
lowing box;  
p If you have difficulty for the online subscrip-  
tion, please call toll-free 1-866-658-7032.  
64  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
07  
Subscribing to the MSN Direct  
service  
Browsing gas prices  
Recent gas prices of nearby gas stations are  
Within two days of completing the subscription,  
displayed in a list.  
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-  
dates gas price information, the information  
provided may not necessarily correspond to ac-  
tual gas prices. Please refer to Notice about  
1
Access the following URL and read the  
description.  
http://www.msndirect.com/pioneer  
2
Be sure to check the coverage area and  
other availabilities of MSN Direct on the  
web page.  
It may take up to 24 hours for all the data to be-  
come available under the following conditions:  
!
!
When you use MSN Direct for the first time.  
When you have not performed this function  
previously around the current area.  
After the navigation system has been  
turned off for a few days.  
3
Go to the page for activation and enter  
your product key.  
!
4
Follow the directions on the web page  
to complete the subscription.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
Activating the MSN Direct function  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
The MSN Directscreen appears.  
After the online subscription, complete the ac-  
tivation so that the navigation system can re-  
ceive the information.  
2
Touch [Gas Prices].  
This operation must be performed under the  
following conditions  
You are currently in the coverage area of  
MSN Direct.  
The signal strength (  
) on MSN Direct”  
screen is not weak.  
1
2
Boot-up your navigation system.  
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
3
Touch the desired tab to change the  
The MSN Directscreen appears.  
Check the signal strength. If the signal is  
weak, move to another location where a stron-  
ger signal can be received.  
sort order.  
3
Touch [Status].  
4
Wait until the activation status changes  
to Active.  
It may take approximately 20 or 30 minutes to  
complete the activation.  
After activation is complete, the information  
will be available on each menu.  
Available options;  
65  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
07  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
!
[Distance] (default):  
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-  
dates movie information, the information pro-  
vided may not necessarily correspond to actual  
movie information. Please refer to Notice  
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-  
tance from the vehicle position.  
[Name]:  
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.  
[Price]:  
!
!
It may take up to 6 hours for all the data to be-  
come available under the following conditions:  
Sorts the items in the list by price.  
!
!
When you use MSN Direct for the first time.  
When you have not performed this function  
previously around the current area.  
After the navigation system has been  
turned off for a few days.  
4
Touch on the item that you want to  
view in detail.  
!
Searching for a theater by  
selecting a movie title  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
1
2
3
2
3
Touch [Movie Times].  
1 The names of gas stations  
2 Gas prices  
Touch [All Movie Titles].  
The movie titles now showing are displayed.  
The information in ( ) shows how current  
the information is.  
3 Distance from the current position  
4
Touch the desired movie title.  
The theaters that are currently showing the se-  
lected movie are displayed.  
5
Touch one of the options at the bottom  
of the Map Confirmation Screento select  
the next operation.  
= For details of other operations on the  
Map Confirmation Screen, refer to What  
Browsing movie times  
Nearby theaters can be displayed on a list.  
Switching the screen allows you to see the  
movie title now showing.  
66  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
07  
5
Touch the desired tab to change the  
Searching for a movie title by  
selecting a theater  
sort order.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
2
Touch [Movie Times].  
The nearby theaters are displayed.  
3
Touch the desired tab to change the  
sort order.  
Available options;  
!
[Distance] (default):  
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-  
tance from the vehicle position.  
[Name]:  
!
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.  
6
Touch on the item that you want to  
view in detail.  
Available options;  
!
[Distance] (default):  
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-  
tance from the vehicle position.  
[Name]:  
!
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.  
4
Touch the desired theater.  
The movie titles currently shown on the se-  
lected theater are displayed.  
1
2
5
Touch on the item that you want to  
1 The names of theaters and their locations  
view in detail.  
2 Distance from the current position  
6
Touch one of the options at the bottom  
7
Touch one of the options at the bottom  
of the Map Confirmation Screento select  
the next operation.  
= For details of other operations on the  
Map Confirmation Screen, refer to What  
of the Map Confirmation Screento select  
the next operation.  
= For details of other operations on the  
Map Confirmation Screen, refer to What  
67  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
07  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
2
Touch [Weather].  
Browsing weather  
information  
Local weather information can be displayed  
on a list. Switching the screen allows you to  
see worldwide weather conditions.  
The local weather information is displayed.  
3
Touch [Worldwide].  
Worldwide weather conditions are displayed.  
The area name, distance and direction from  
current position are displayed on the list. The  
list is sorted alphabetically by the area name.  
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-  
dates weather information, the information  
provided may not necessarily correspond to ac-  
tual weather conditions. Please refer to Notice  
4
Touch the desired area.  
Detailed information is displayed.  
Using traffic information  
You can view current traffic conditions and in-  
formation. When the navigation system re-  
ceives updated traffic information, it will  
overlay the traffic information on your map  
and also display detailed text information  
when available.  
Checking the local weather  
information  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
In the default setting, the navigation system  
takes into account traffic information and tries  
to avoid traffic congestions and suggest better  
routes. Also, when you are traveling along a  
route and the system finds another better  
route for avoiding the traffic congestion, the  
current route will be recalculated automati-  
cally.  
2
Touch [Weather].  
The local weather information is displayed.  
The area name, distance and direction from  
current position are displayed on the list. The  
items on the list are sorted by distance.  
3
Touch the desired area.  
Detailed information is displayed.  
The term traffic congestionin this section in-  
dicates the following types of traffic condi-  
tions:  
Stop-and-go traffic  
Stopped traffic  
Closed/blocked roads  
Viewing the traffic event  
Traffic Information is displayed on a screen in  
the form of a list. This allows you to check how  
many traffic incidents have occurred, their lo-  
cation and their distance from your current po-  
sition.  
Touching [Forecast] displays the weather fore-  
casts for these three days.  
Checking worldwide weather  
conditions  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
68  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
07  
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-  
dates traffic information, the information pro-  
vided may not necessarily correspond to actual  
traffic conditions. Please refer to Notice about  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
2
Touch [Traffic].  
Traffic event icon and line  
with yellow line:  
Heavy traffic  
with red line:  
Traffic jam  
with black line:  
Closed/blocked roads  
etc.:  
A list with traffic information that has been re-  
ceived is shown. The list is sorted by distance  
from your current position.  
Places (street names) where incidents have  
occurred are displayed on the list.  
!
!
!
!
1
2
3
Accidents, constructions, etc.  
Viewing the traffic flow  
Traffic Information is displayed on a screen in  
the form of a list. This allows you to check how  
many traffic incidents have occurred, their lo-  
cation and their distance from your current po-  
sition.  
4
5
1 Event-related icon  
2 Street or location and direction  
3 Distance to the location and event  
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-  
dates traffic information, the information pro-  
vided may not necessarily correspond to actual  
traffic conditions. Please refer to Notice about  
4 Switching to traffic flow list  
= For more details concerning the opera-  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
5 Touch to change the settings of traffic infor-  
mation.  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
= For more details concerning the opera-  
2
3
Touch [Traffic].  
Touch [Traffic Flow].  
A list with traffic event information that has  
been received is shown.  
Places (street names) where incidents have  
occurred are displayed on the list.  
3
Touch the item you want to check its  
position on the map.  
The traffic event information displayed on the  
map is as follows.  
69  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
07  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
1
2
3
Setting the traffic information  
Preferred functions related to traffic informa-  
tion can be set.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
2
Touch [Traffic] and then touch [Set-  
tings].  
The Traffic Settingsscreen appears.  
4
5
1 Flow-related icon  
2 Street or location and direction  
3 Distance to the location and event  
4 Switching to traffic event list  
= For more details concerning the opera-  
5 Touch to change the settings of traffic infor-  
mation.  
Available options;  
!
Recalculate route avoiding traffic”  
[Enabled]:  
Calculates the new route with the traffic  
= For more details concerning the opera-  
congestion taken into account when rerout-  
ing.  
[Disabled]:  
Calculates the new route without taking  
traffic jam into account when rerouting.  
Sort events by”  
[Distance]:  
Sorts the traffic event items in the list by  
distance.  
4
Touch the item you want to check its  
position on the map.  
The traffic event information displayed on the  
map is as follows.  
!
!
[Type]:  
Sorts the traffic event items in the list by  
event type.  
Use traffic information”  
[On]:  
Calculates the route with the traffic conges-  
tion taken into account in the initial calcula-  
tion.  
Traffic flow icon and line  
!
!
Red: average speed in this area is slower  
than 15 mph (24 km/h)  
Yellow: average speed in this area is be-  
tween 15 mph to 45 mph (24 km/h to 72 km/  
h)  
Green: average speed in this area is faster  
than 45 mph (72 km/h) (An icon without a  
line will be displayed)  
[Off]:  
Calculates the route without taking traffic  
jam into account in the initial  
calculation.  
!
70  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
Browsing news headlines  
07  
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-  
dates local event information, the information  
provided may not necessarily correspond to ac-  
tual local event conditions. Please refer to No-  
Recent news headlines are displayed in a list.  
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-  
dates news headlines, the information pro-  
vided may not necessarily correspond to  
current news headlines. Please refer to Notice  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
2
Touch [Local Events].  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
The recent local events are displayed in a list.  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
3
Touch the desired event to display de-  
2
3
Touch [News Headlines].  
tailed information of the event.  
Touch the desired news headline.  
Available options;  
!
[Name]:  
Further details about the news are displayed.  
Touch or to scroll the list.  
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.  
[Distance]:  
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-  
tance from the vehicle position.  
[Time]:  
!
4
!
Sorts the items in the list in order by the  
time when the event is opened.  
4
Touch [Select] to display there with the  
map.  
Browsing local events  
The nearby events to be held in the next few  
days are displayed on a list, and you can see  
the detail event information.  
The Map Confirmation Screenappears.  
71  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
07  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
p Arrow in the left of each item indicates the  
5
Touch one of the options at the bottom  
stock price movement. If there is no stock  
price movements than previous close, “—”  
is displayed.  
of the Map Confirmation Screento select  
the next operation.  
= For details of other operations on the  
Map Confirmation Screen, refer to What  
4
Touch the stock symbol that you want  
to add.  
When you touch the symbol, a check mark ap-  
pears indicating that it is selected.  
p To cancel the selection, remove the check  
mark by touching the item again.  
Browsing stock quotes  
Recent stock quotes are displayed in a list.  
5
Touch  
.
Although the stock quote displayed onscreen  
is updated about 40 minutes (approx.), these  
prices are not realtime values.  
It may take up to 20 minutes for all the data to  
become available under the following condi-  
tions:  
Viewing the detailed stock quotes  
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
1
2
3
Touch [Stock Quotes].  
!
!
When you use MSN Direct for the first time.  
When you have not performed this function  
previously around the current area.  
After the navigation system has been  
turned off for a few days.  
Touch the desired stock quote.  
!
Selecting stock symbols  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
Detailed stock quote information is dis-  
played.  
2
3
Touch [Stock Quotes].  
p The blank list appears when no symbols are  
selected.  
Touch [Select Stocks].  
72  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using hands-free phoning  
Hands-free phoning overview  
08  
Displaying the Phone Menu  
Use the Phone Menuif you connect the cel-  
lular phone to the navigation system for utiliza-  
tion.  
CAUTION  
For your safety, avoid talking on the phone as  
much as possible while driving.  
1
Press the MENU button to display the  
If your cellular phone features Bluetooth®  
technology, this navigation system can be con-  
nected to your cellular phone wirelessly. Using  
this hands-free function, you can operate the  
navigation system to make or receive phone  
calls. You can also transfer the phone book  
data stored in your cellular phone to the navi-  
gation system. This section describes how to  
set up a Bluetooth connection and how to op-  
erate a cellular phone featuring Bluetooth  
technology on the navigation system.  
Top Menu.  
2
Touch [Phone].  
1
2 3  
4
For more information about the connectivity  
with the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth  
wireless technology, refer to the information  
on our website.  
1
: Network name of the cellular phone  
company  
: Reception status of the cellular phone  
: Battery status of the cellular phone  
: Name of connected cellular phone  
2
3
4
Preparing communication  
devices  
This navigation system has a built-in function  
to use cellular phones featuring Bluetooth  
wireless technology.  
Registering your cellular  
phone  
You need to register your cellular phone featur-  
ing Bluetooth wireless technology when you  
connect it for the first time. A total of three  
phones can be registered. Three registration  
methods are available:  
While your cellular phone featuring Bluetooth  
wireless technology is connected, the Blue-  
tooth connection status indicator lights.  
= For details, refer to Notes for hands-free  
p When the navigation system is turned off,  
the Bluetooth connection is also discon-  
nected. When the system restarts, the sys-  
tem automatically attempts to reconnect  
the previously-connected cellular phone.  
Even when the connection is severed for  
some reason, the system automatically re-  
connects the specified cellular phone (ex-  
cept when the connection is severed due to  
cellular phone operation).  
!
!
!
Searching for nearby phones  
Searching for a specified phone  
Pairing from your cellular phone  
p The default device name displayed on the  
cellular phone is Pioneer Navi. The PIN  
code is 1111.  
73  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Using hands-free phoning  
Searching for nearby phones  
A message prompting you to enter a PIN code  
appears.  
The system searches for available cellular  
phones near the navigation system, displays  
them in a list, and registers them for connec-  
tion.  
7
Enter the PIN code 1111using the cel-  
lular phone.  
1
Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-  
nology on your cellular phone.  
For some cellular phones, no specific action is  
necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless tech-  
nology. For details, refer to the instruction  
manual of your cellular phone.  
2
Touch [Phone Settings] on the Phone  
Menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
When a connection is successfully estab-  
lished, a connection complete message ap-  
pears, the screen returns to the Phone  
Settingsmenu by touching [OK].  
3
4
Touch [Connection].  
Touch [Add Device], and then [Search  
devices].  
Searching for a specified phone  
The system searches for cellular phones fea-  
turing Bluetooth technology that are waiting  
for the connection and displays them in the  
list if the device has found.  
If you cannot connect your phone using  
[Search devices] and [Pair from the mobile  
phone], try this method if your phone is found  
in the list.  
p Up to 10 cellular phones will be listed in the  
order that the cellular phone is found.  
1
Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-  
nology on your cellular phone.  
5
Wait until your cellular phone appears  
For some cellular phones, no specific action is  
necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless tech-  
nology. For details, refer to the instruction  
manual of your cellular phone.  
in the list.  
p If you cannot find the cellular phone you  
want to connect, check that the cellular  
phone is waiting for the Bluetooth wireless  
technology connection.  
2
Touch [Phone Settings] on the Phone  
Menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
6
Touch the cellular phone name you  
want to register.  
3
4
Touch [Connection].  
Touch [Add Device], and then [Select  
specific devices].  
74  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using hands-free phoning  
08  
5
Touch the model name of the cellular  
1
Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-  
phone to be connected.  
nology on your cellular phone.  
The system searches for cellular phones fea-  
turing Bluetooth technology that are waiting  
for the connection and displays them in the  
list if the device has found.  
For some cellular phones, no specific action is  
necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless tech-  
nology. For details, refer to the instruction  
manual of your cellular phone.  
2
Touch [Phone Settings] on the Phone  
Menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
3
4
Touch [Connection].  
Touch [Add Device], and then [Pair from  
the mobile phone].  
The navigation system waits for a Bluetooth  
wireless technology connection.  
p If you cannot find the desired model name  
on the list, touch [Other phones] to search  
the cellular phones available nearby.  
6
Select the cellular phone you want to  
register from the list.  
A message prompting you to enter a PIN code  
appears.  
7
Enter the PIN code 1111using the cel-  
lular phone.  
5
Register the navigation system on your  
cellular phone.  
If your cellular phone asks you to enter a pass-  
word, enter the PIN code (password) of the na-  
vigation system.  
After the registration is completed, the follow-  
ing screen appears.  
When a connection is successfully estab-  
lished, a connection complete message ap-  
pears, the screen returns to the Phone  
Settingsmenu by touching [OK].  
Pairing from your cellular phone  
You can register the cellular phone by setting  
the navigation system to standby mode and re-  
questing connection from the cellular phone.  
p If registration fails repeat the procedure  
from the beginning.  
75  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Using hands-free phoning  
When a connection is successfully estab-  
lished, a connection complete message ap-  
pears, the screen returns to the Phone  
Settingsmenu by touching [OK].  
p To cancel the connection to your cellular  
phone, touch [Cancel].  
p If connection fails, check to see whether  
your cellular phone is waiting for a connec-  
tion and then retry.  
Connecting a registered  
cellular phone  
The navigation system automatically connects  
the cellular phone selected as the target of  
connection. However, connect the cellular  
phone manually in the following cases:  
!
Two or more cellular phones are registered,  
and you want to manually select the cellu-  
lar phone to be used.  
!
!
You want to reconnect a disconnected cel-  
lular phone.  
Connection cannot be established automa-  
tically for some reason.  
Disconnecting a cellular phone  
1
Touch [Phone Settings] on the Phone  
Menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
If you start connection manually, carry out the  
following procedure. You can also connect the  
phone by having the navigation system detect  
it automatically.  
= For details, refer to Setting automatic con-  
2
3
Touch [Connection].  
Touch [Disconnect] next to the cellular  
phone name.  
1
Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-  
nology on your cellular phone.  
Deleting a registered phone  
For some cellular phones, no specific action is  
necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless tech-  
nology. For details, refer to the instruction  
manual of your cellular phone.  
If you no longer need to use a registered  
phone with the navigation system, you can de-  
lete it from the registration assignment to free  
this spot up for another phone.  
2
Touch [Phone Settings] on the Phone  
Menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
p If a registered phone is deleted, all the  
phone book entries and call history lists  
that correspond to the phone will be also  
cleared.  
3
4
Touch [Connection].  
1
Touch [Phone Settings] on the Phone  
Menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
Touch the name of the cellular phone  
that you want to connect.  
2
3
Touch [Connection].  
Touch [Delete] next to the cellular  
phone name.  
The registration is canceled.  
Connection starts.  
76  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using hands-free phoning  
Receiving a phone call  
08  
You can perform hands-free answering by  
using the navigation system.  
Answering an incoming call  
The system informs you that it is receiving a  
call by displaying a message and producing a  
ring sound.  
If [Auto Answer Preference] is set to [Off],  
answer the call manually. Answering is avail-  
able if any screen is displayed, such as the  
map screen or the setting screen.  
p You can set this navigation system to auto-  
matically answer incoming calls.  
3
Touch  
to end the call.  
The call ends.  
p When there is an incoming call, pressing  
MULTI-CONTROL answers the call. During  
the call, pressing MULTI-CONTROL gets  
you off the phone.  
p If the voice on the other end of the call is  
too quiet to hear, you can adjust the volume  
of the received voice.  
= For details, refer to Answering a call  
1
When a call comes in, the answering  
= For more details about Phone Vo-  
lume, refer to Setting the phone volume  
operation menu appears on the bottom of  
the screen.  
p You may hear a noise when you hang up  
the phone.  
2
To answer an incoming call, touch  
.
Rejecting an incoming call  
You can reject an incoming call.  
= For details, refer to Setting the automatic re-  
%
When a call comes in, touch  
.
The call is rejected.  
p The rejected call is recorded in the missed  
call history list.  
= For details, refer to Dialing from the history  
When there is an incoming call, you can reject  
it by touching  
p You can adjust volume when you are talk-  
ing. To adjust volume, touch [Vol ] and  
[Vol +] displayed on the screen (like below)  
when you are talking.  
.
Making a phone call  
You can make a phone call in many different  
ways.  
77  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Using hands-free phoning  
Direct dialing  
1
Touch [Dialed Numbers] on the Phone  
Menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
1
Touch [Dial Pad] on the Phone Menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
The direct dial screen appears.  
2
If you touch an entry on the list, dialing  
starts.  
p If you touch [Detail], you can check the de-  
tails of the party before making a phone  
call.  
p To cancel the call after the system starts  
2
Touch the number keys to enter the  
phone number.  
The phone number that was input is dis-  
played.  
Input number  
dialing, touch  
.
3
Touch to end the call.  
Making a phone call using the  
received call history  
The received call history saves 30 calls per re-  
gistered cellular phone. If the number of calls  
exceeds 30, the oldest entry will be deleted.  
1
Touch [Received Calls] on the Phone  
Menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
:
The input number is deleted a digit at a time  
from the end of the number. Continuing to  
press this deletes all of the digits.  
2
If you touch an entry on the list, dialing  
:
starts.  
p If you touch [Detail], you can check the de-  
Return to the previous screen.  
tails of the party before making a phone  
call.  
p To cancel the call after the system starts  
3
Touch  
p To cancel the call after the system starts  
dialing, touch  
to make a call.  
.
dialing, touch  
.
4
Touch  
to end the call.  
3
Touch to end the call.  
Dialing from the history  
Making a phone call using missed  
call history  
The missed call history saves 20 calls per re-  
gistered cellular phone. If the number of calls  
exceeds 20, the oldest entry will be deleted.  
The most recent calls made (dialed), received  
and missed are stored in the call history list.  
You can browse the call history list and call  
numbers from it.  
Making a phone call using the dialed  
number history  
The dialed number history saves 30 calls per  
registered cellular phone. If the entries exceed  
30, the oldest one will be deleted.  
1
Touch [Missed Calls] on the Phone  
Menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
78  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using hands-free phoning  
08  
2
If you touch an entry on the list, dialing  
Touching [Others] displays the page including  
entries that are not assigned to any of the  
other tabs.  
starts.  
p If you touch [Detail], you can check the de-  
tails of the party before making a phone  
call.  
p To cancel the call after the system starts  
4
Touch the desired entry on the list to  
make a call.  
dialing, touch  
.
5
Touch  
to end the call.  
3
Touch to end the call.  
Dialing a phone number of the POI  
You can make a call to the POI that has a tele-  
phone number.  
Calling a number in the  
Contactsscreen  
After finding the entry you want to call in the  
Contactsscreen, you can select the number  
and make the call.  
1
To display the  
Map Confirmation Screen, search for a  
locations or moves the cursor and touch  
.
1
Press the MENU button to display the  
Top Menu.  
2
Touch [Info] and select the POI that has  
a telephone number.  
2
Touch [Contacts].  
The Contactsscreen appears.  
3
Touch [Call] to make a call.  
3
Switch the page of the list to display  
the desired entry.  
If you touch an alphabet tab, you can jump to  
the first page of the contacts whose names  
start with that letter.  
To cancel the call after the system starts dial-  
ing, touch  
.
4
Touch  
to end the call.  
Making a call home easily  
You can call home without taking the time to  
enter the phone number if the phone number  
has been registered.  
or  
:
Shows the next or previous page.  
Alphabet tabs  
Makes the screen jump to the beginning of  
the page including the entry whose names  
start with any of selected alphabets.  
Touching [#ABCDE] also displays the page in-  
cluding the entry whose names start with pri-  
mary symbols or numbers.  
%
Touch [Call Home] on the Phone  
Menu.  
Dialing home starts.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
79  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Using hands-free phoning  
p If you have not registered your home num-  
ber, a message appears. Touch [Yes] to  
start registration.  
Announcing incoming  
short mails  
While the cellular phone and the navigation  
system are connected, the following notice is  
displayed when you get a new SMS message.  
New mail from: (senders name)is dis-  
played and the notice disappears after eight  
seconds.  
= For more details about Set Home,  
Dialing GOOG-411  
CAUTION  
Local and/or long distance charges for making a  
phone call may apply.  
You can dial GOOG-411 to dial the free busi-  
ness listing service of Googleä with one  
touch.  
1
Touch [GOOG-411] on the Phone  
Menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
p Touch anywhere on the screen to clear the  
announcement message.  
p If the voice language with TTS is currently  
used, the audible message can be output.  
= For details, refer to Selecting the lan-  
Dialing GOOG-411 starts.  
2
You can now use the GOOG-411 phone  
service.  
For details about GOOG-411 service and avail-  
ability, contact Googleä.  
Transferring the phone book  
You can transfer the numbers in a registered  
user phones address book into the phone  
book.  
p With some cellular phones, it may not be  
possible to transfer the entire phone book  
at once. In this case, transfer addresses  
one at a time from your phone book using  
your cellular phone.  
p The maximum 400 entries can be trans-  
ferred per cellular phone. If the entries ex-  
ceed 400, the extra entries will not be  
transferred. If more than one number is re-  
gistered for one person, such as work place  
and home, each number is counted sepa-  
rately.  
p Each entry can hold up to 3 phone num-  
bers.  
80  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using hands-free phoning  
08  
p The transferred data can not be edited on  
p Depending on the cellular phone that is  
connected to this navigation system via  
Bluetooth technology, this navigation sys-  
tem may not be able to display the phone  
book correctly. (Some characters may be  
garbled.)  
the navigation system.  
5
When the completion message ap-  
pears, check the message and touch [OK].  
Transfer ends.  
p If the phone book in the cellular phone con-  
tains image data, the phone book may not  
be correctly transferred.  
Clearing memory  
You can clear the memory of each item that  
corresponds to the connected cellular phone:  
phone book, dialed/received/missed call his-  
tory list and preset dials.  
1
Connect the cellular phone that has the  
phone book to transfer.  
= For details, refer to Connecting a registered  
1
Touch [Phone Settings] on the Phone  
Menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
2
Touch [Phone Book Transfer] on the  
Phone Menu.  
The confirmation messages appear.  
3
Check the messages and touch [OK].  
p If there is a phone book already transferred,  
a message asking whether you can accept  
the data replacement appears.  
2
Touch [Clear Memory].  
4
Check that the following screen is dis-  
played, and operate your cellular phone to  
transfer the phone book entries.  
On this screen, you can select the following  
items:  
Contacts:  
You can clear the registered phone book.  
Received Calls List:  
You can clear the received call history list.  
Dialed Calls List:  
You can clear the dialed call history list.  
Missed Calls List:  
You can clear the missed call history list.  
p Touching [Clear] displays the confirmation  
message for clearing the memory.  
p Touching [Clear All] clears all the data that  
correspond to the connected cellular  
phone.  
Transfer starts. It may take time depending on  
how many entries will be transferred.  
p You can send the phone book entries re-  
peatedly before touching [OK]. If your cellu-  
lar phone supports one-by-one transfer  
only, send all the entries that you want to  
transfer before touching [OK].  
p If your phone has a capability for automatic  
transfer of phone book, this screen is  
skipped and transfer will start.  
81  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Using hands-free phoning  
3
Touch [OK].  
Stopping Bluetooth wave  
transmission  
You can stop transmission of electric waves by  
turning off the Bluetooth function. If you do  
not use the Bluetooth wireless technology, we  
recommend selecting [Off].  
Data on the selected item is cleared from this  
navigation systems memory.  
p If you do not want to clear memory that you  
have selected, touch [Cancel].  
Setting the phone  
1
Touch [Phone Settings] on the Phone  
Menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
Setting the phone volume  
The volume level for hands-free phoning can  
be adjusted.  
2
Touch [Off] next to Bluetooth On/Off.  
1
Touch [Phone Volume] on the Phone  
Menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
Touching [Bluetooth On/Off] switching be-  
tween [On] and [Off].  
Answering a call automatically  
2
Adjust volume to touch the sliders of  
[Phone Ringtone] and [Phone Voice].  
The navigation system automatically answers  
incoming calls to the cellular phone, so you  
can answer a call while driving without taking  
your hands off the steering wheel.  
1
Touch [Phone Settings] on the Phone  
Menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
2
Touch the key next to [Auto Answer  
Preference].  
Auto Answer Preference selection appears.  
[Phone Ringtone]:  
This setting controls the incoming ring tone  
volume.  
3
Touch the desired option.  
[Phone Voice]:  
This setting controls the incoming voice vo-  
lume.  
p Phone volume varies depending on the in-  
coming caller's phone, volume setting and  
other conditions.  
= For details concerning operations, refer  
[Off]: No automatic response. Respond manu-  
ally  
[Immediately]: Answers immediately  
[After 3 seconds]: Answers after three sec-  
onds  
82  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using hands-free phoning  
08  
[After 6 seconds]: Answers after six seconds  
[After 10 seconds]: Answers after ten sec-  
onds  
of the processes for establishing a connec-  
tion.  
p With some cellular phones, it may not be  
possible to perform automatic connection.  
Setting the automatic rejection  
function  
If this function is on, the navigation system  
automatically rejects all incoming calls.  
1
Touch [Phone Settings] on the Phone  
Menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
2
Touch [Auto Connect].  
1
Touch [Phone Settings] on the Phone  
Menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
Touching [Auto Connect] switches between  
[On] and [Off].  
p Automatic connection is performed in the  
registration number order.  
p Some cellular phones do not support auto-  
matic connection.  
2
Touch the key next to Refuse All  
Calls.  
Touching the key activates or deactivates the  
function.  
p If both Refuse All Callsand Auto An-  
swer Preferenceare activated, Refuse  
All Callstakes priority and all incoming  
calls are automatically rejected.  
Editing the device name  
You can change the device name to be dis-  
played on your cellular phone. (Default is  
[Pioneer Navi].)  
1
Touch [Phone Settings] on the Phone  
Menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
Echo canceling and noise reduction  
When you are operating hands-free phoning  
in the vehicle, you may hear an undesirable  
echo. This function reduces the echo and  
noise while you are using hands-free phoning,  
and maintains a certain sound quality.  
2
Touch [Edit Name].  
The keyboard to enter the name appears.  
3
Touch to delete the current name,  
1
Touch [Phone Settings] on the Phone  
Menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
and enter the new name by using the key-  
board.  
2
Touch [Echo Cancel].  
Touching [Echo Cancel] switches between  
[On] and [Off].  
Setting automatic connection  
When automatic connection is active, the na-  
vigation system will automatically establish a  
connection with a registered phone when it  
comes into range. Using this feature avoids all  
4
Touch [Done].  
The name is changed.  
83  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Using hands-free phoning  
p Up to 30 characters can be entered for a de-  
When you answer the phone by using  
the button on the phone.  
vice name.  
When the person on the other end of  
line hangs up the phone.  
!
!
!
If the person on the other end of the phone  
call cannot hear the conversation due to an  
echo, decrease the volume level for hands-  
free phoning. This may reduce the echo.  
With some cellular phones, even if you  
press the accept button on the cellular  
phone when a call comes in, hands-free  
phoning may not be performed.  
The registered name appears if the phone  
number of the received call is already regis-  
tered in the phone book. When one phone  
number is registered under different  
names, the name that comes first alphabe-  
tically is displayed.  
If the phone number of the received call is  
not registered in the phone book, the  
phone number of the received call appears.  
During incoming and outgoing calls or talk-  
ing on a phone, you can only do the follow-  
ing operations:  
Notes for hands-free phoning  
General notes  
!
Connection to all cellular phones featuring  
Bluetooth wireless technology is not guar-  
anteed.  
!
The line-of-sight distance between this na-  
vigation system and your cellular phone  
must be 10 meters or less when sending  
and receiving voice and data via Bluetooth  
technology. However, the actual transmis-  
sion distance may be shorter than the esti-  
mated distance, depending on the usage  
environment.  
!
!
With some cellular phones, the speakers of  
the system may not produce a ring sound.  
If private mode is selected on the cellular  
phone, hands-free phoning may be dis-  
abled.  
!
!
!
!
The cellular phone used must be compati-  
ble with the profile of this navigation sys-  
tem.  
When using Bluetooth wireless technology,  
this navigation system may not be able to  
operate all of the functions on the cellular  
phone.  
Touching  
,
, [Vol +], and [Vol ].  
Press the MAP button.  
Scrolling the map and changing the  
map scale.  
The received call history and the dialed  
number history  
!
Registration and connection  
Calls made or editing performed only on  
your cellular phone will not be reflected to  
the dialed number history or phone book in  
the navigation system.  
You cannot make a call to the entry of an  
unknown user (no phone number) in the re-  
ceived call history.  
History data will be recorded into the navi-  
gation system only when your cellular  
phone is pairing with the navigation sys-  
tem.  
!
Cellular phone operations vary depending  
on the type of cellular phone. Refer to the  
instruction manual that came with your cel-  
lular phone for detailed instructions.  
With cellular phones, phone book transfer  
may not work even though your phone is  
paired with the navigation system. In that  
case, disconnect your phone, perform pair-  
ing again from your phone to the naviga-  
tion system, and then perform the phone  
book transfer.  
!
!
!
Phone book transfers  
Making and receiving calls  
!
If there are more than 400 phone book en-  
tries on your cellular phone, all entries may  
not be able to be downloaded completely.  
!
You may hear a noise in the following situa-  
tions:  
84  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using hands-free phoning  
08  
!
!
With some cellular phones, it may not be  
possible to transfer all items in the phone  
book at one time. In this case, transfer  
items one by one from your cellular phone.  
Depending on the cellular phone, this navi-  
gation system may not display the phone  
book correctly. (Some characters may be  
garbled, or first name and last name may  
be in reverse order.)  
!
!
If the phone book in the cellular phone con-  
tains image data, the phone book may not  
be transferred correctly. (Image data can-  
not be transferred from the cellular phone.)  
Depending on the cellular phone, phone  
book transfer may not be available.  
3
Touch [Software Update].  
Update starts.  
Updating the Bluetooth  
wireless technology software  
Update files will be available for download in  
the future. You will be able to download the lat-  
est update from an appropriate website to  
your PC.  
p Before you download the files and install  
the update, read through the instructions  
on the website. Follow the instructions on  
the website for steps until [Software Up-  
date] becomes active.  
p Registered phones that are listed on [Con-  
nection] are cleared by the software up-  
date.  
1
Touch [Phone Settings] on the Phone  
Menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
2
Touch [Bluetooth Software Update].  
The current version is displayed.  
85  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
09  
Playing audio CDs  
You can play a normal music CD using the  
built-in drive of the navigation system. This  
section describes how.  
Using the touch panel keys  
Touch panel keys  
1
2
1
Insert the disc you want to play into  
disc-loading slot.  
Playback starts from the first track of the CD.  
3
4
2
Touch [DISC] on the AV Sourcemenu  
to display the CDscreen.  
5
6
7
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
3
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
1 Recall equalizer curves  
to control the disc.  
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer  
2 Display the Functionmenu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
3 Switch the media file type played  
= For details, refer to Switch the media  
4 Skip the track forward or backward  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
track. Touching [o] once skips to the start  
of the current track. Touching it again will skip  
to the previous track.  
Reading the screen  
1
2
3
4
Fast reverse or forward  
Touch and hold [o] or [p] to fast rewind  
or fast forward.  
p Fast reverse is canceled when it reaches  
the beginning of the first track on the  
disc.  
p Moving MULTI-CONTROL left or right  
enables you to perform the equivalent  
operations.  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Track number indicator  
Shows the number of the track currently play-  
ing.  
3 Scan/Random/Repeat indicator  
The marks shown below indicate the current  
playback status.  
5 Playback and Pause  
: Scan  
Touching [f] switches between playback”  
and pause.  
: Random  
6 Shuffle All  
and repeat range: Displays the current  
repeat range  
4 Play time indicator  
All of the songs in the disc can be played at  
random by touching only one key.  
p [Shuffle All] is not available for AVIC-  
X7115BT.  
Shows the elapsed playing time within the  
current track.  
p To cancel random play, switch [Ran-  
dom] to [Off] on the Functionmenu.  
7 Display the map screen  
86  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing audio CDs  
09  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
Selecting a track from the list  
The list lets you see the list of track titles, file  
names or folder names on a disc and select  
one of them to play.  
!
!
Disc Repeats the current disc  
Track Repeats just the current track  
p If you perform track search or fast for-  
ward/rewind, repeat play is automati-  
cally canceled.  
1
2
Touch [List].  
2 Play tracks in a random order  
Touching [Random] switches between [On]  
and [Off].  
Touch the track you want to play.  
3 Scan tracks of a CD  
Touching [Scan] switches between [On]  
and [Off]. Scan play lets you hear the first  
10 seconds of each track on the CD. When  
you find the track you want, touch [Scan] to  
turn scan play off.  
p After scanning is finished, normal play-  
back of the tracks will begin again.  
The track currently playing is highlighted.  
Touching or switches the selection to the  
next or previous page in the list.  
p The “–” mark is displayed if there is no cor-  
responding information.  
3
To return to the previous screen, touch  
[Detail].  
Using the Functionmenu  
1
Touch [DISC] on the AV Sourcemenu  
to display the CDscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
2
Touch [Func].  
1
2
3
1 Repeating play  
87  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
10  
Playing music files on ROM  
and repeat range: Displays the current  
repeat range  
5 File type indicator  
Shows the type of audio file currently playing.  
6 Play time indicator  
You can play a disc that contains compressed  
audio files using the built-in drive of the navi-  
gation system. This section describes these  
operations.  
p In the following description, the MP3,  
WMA, AAC, WAV files are collectively re-  
ferred to as Compressed audio file.  
p AVIC-X9115BT cannot play WAV files.  
Shows the elapsed playing time within the  
current track.  
7 Folder name indicator  
Shows the folder name currently playing.  
8 Song number indicator  
Shows the number of the song playing in the  
selected list.  
1
Insert the disc you want to play into  
disc-loading slot.  
Playback starts from the first file of the ROM.  
9 Song title indicator  
Shows the title of the current song.  
a Artist name indicator  
Shows the artist name for the current song.  
b Album title indicator  
2
Touch [DISC] on the AV Sourcemenu  
to display the ROMscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Shows the title of the album for the current  
song.  
3
Use this ROM screen to play the disc.  
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel  
Using the touch panel keys  
Reading the screen  
1
2
3
12  
3
5
4
6
7
8
4
5
6
7
8
9
a
b
1 Switch the media file type played  
When playing a disc containing a mixture of  
various media file types, you can switch be-  
tween media files types to play.  
Touch [Media] repeatedly to switch between  
the following media file types:  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Folder number indicator  
Shows the folder number currently playing.  
3 Track indicator  
CD (audio data (CD-DA)) ROM (com-  
pressed audio file) DivX (DivX video files)  
p This touch panel key appears only when  
playing a disc containing a mixture of  
various media file types.  
Shows the track number currently playing.  
4 Scan/Random/Repeat indicator  
The marks shown below indicate the current  
playback status.  
: Scan  
2 Recall equalizer curves  
: Random  
88  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing music files on ROM  
10  
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer  
Selecting a track from the list  
The list lets you see the list of track titles or  
folder names on a disc. Touch a folder on the  
list to view its contents. You can play a track  
on the list by touching it.  
3 Display the Functionmenu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
4 Select the previous or next folder  
p Touching these keys enables you to se-  
lect the previous or next folder and play-  
back the first track on the folder. You  
cannot select a folder that does not  
have a compressed audio file.  
5 Skip the track forward or backward  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
track. Touching [o] once skips to the start  
of the current track. Touching it again will skip  
to the previous track.  
1
2
Touch [List].  
Touch the folder that you want to view.  
Fast reverse or forward  
Touch and hold [o] or [p] to fast rewind  
or fast forward.  
p Fast rewind stops when it reaches the  
beginning of the first file on the repeat  
range.  
p In the case of compressed audio files,  
there is no sound on fast rewind or for-  
ward.  
p Moving MULTI-CONTROL left or right  
enables you to perform the equivalent  
operations.  
The track currently playing is highlighted.  
Touching or switches the selection to the  
next or previous page in the list.  
Touching  
folder (parent folder). If the uppermost folder  
is listed, cannot be used.  
displays the content of the upper  
p If the selected folder does not contain any  
playable track, the track list is not dis-  
played.  
6 Playback and Pause  
3
Touch the track you want to play.  
p To cancel the list screen, touch [Detail].  
Touching [f] switches between playback”  
and pause.  
7 Shuffle All  
All of the songs in the disc can be played at  
random by touching only one key.  
p If the disc contains a mixture of various  
media file types, all tracks within the  
current part (CDor ROM) are played  
randomly.  
Browsing embedded text  
information  
Text information recorded in a compressed  
audio file disc can be displayed.  
%
Touch  
.
p [Shuffle All] is not available for AVIC-  
X7115BT.  
The next piece of information is displayed.  
!
!
!
!
!
Album Title : (album title)*  
Track Title : (track title)*  
Folder Title : (folder title)  
File Name : (file name)  
p To cancel random play, switch [Ran-  
dom] to [Off] on the Functionmenu.  
8 Display the map screen  
Artist Name : (artist name)*  
If no information has been recorded for the  
item, none can be displayed.  
89  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
10  
Playing music files on ROM  
p For WAV files, only the information marked  
with (*) can be displayed.  
p If you operate no functions for about 30 sec-  
onds, the display automatically returns to  
the ordinary display.  
2 Play tracks in a random order  
Touching [Random] switches between [On]  
and [Off]. When using ROM, the tracks in  
the current repeat play range are randomly  
played.  
p If you turn [Random] to [On] when the  
repeat play range is set to [Track], the re-  
peat play range changes to [Folder]  
automatically.  
Using the Functionmenu  
1
Touch [DISC] on the AV Sourcemenu  
3 Scan folders and tracks  
to display the ROMscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds  
of each track. Scan play is performed in the  
current repeat play range.  
Touching [Scan] switches between [On]  
and [Off]. When you find the track you  
want, touch [Scan] to turn scan play off.  
p After completion of track or folder scan-  
ning, normal playback of the tracks will  
begin again.  
2
Touch [Func].  
p If you turn [Scan] to [On] when the re-  
peat play range is set to [Track], the re-  
peat play range changes to [Folder]  
automatically.  
p If you turn [Scan] to [On] while the re-  
peat play range is set to [Disc], scan  
play is performed for only the first tracks  
of each folder.  
1
2
3
1 Repeating play  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
!
Disc Repeats all compressed audio  
files  
!
!
Track Repeats just the current track  
Folder Repeats the current folder  
p If you select another folder during repeat  
play, the repeat play range changes to  
[Disc].  
p If you perform fast forward/rewind dur-  
ing [Track], the repeat play range  
changes to [Folder].  
p When [Folder] is selected, it is not pos-  
sible to play back a subfolder of that  
folder.  
p When playing discs with compressed  
audio files and audio data (CD-DA), re-  
peat play is performed within the cur-  
rently playing data session even if [Disc]  
is selected.  
90  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing a DVD-Video  
11  
You can play a DVD-Video using the built-in  
drive of the navigation system. This section de-  
scribes operations for playing a DVD-Video.  
p AVIC-X7115BT cannot play DVDs.  
Using the touch panel keys  
Playback screen (page1)  
1
2
Reading the screen  
3
4
12 3 45  
7
8
6
5
6
7
a
9
8 9 ab  
1
Playback screen (page2)  
2
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Audio track indicator  
c
d
Shows the audio track number and audio lan-  
guage currently selected.  
3 Title number indicator  
e
6
7
Shows the title number currently playing.  
4 Audio channel indicator  
Shows the current audio channel type, such  
as Mch(Multi-channel).  
f 9g b  
1
Playback screen (page3)  
2
5 Chapter number indicator  
Shows the chapter currently playing.  
6 Subtitle language indicator  
Shows the subtitle language currently se-  
lected.  
h
i
j
7 Digital sound format indicator  
Shows which digital sound format (surround  
sound format) has been selected.  
8 Play time indicator  
k
6
7
Shows the elapsed playing time within the  
current title.  
8 9  
b
p With some discs, the icon 9 may be dis-  
played, meaning that the operation is not  
valid.  
9 Viewing angle indicator  
Shows what viewing angle has been selected.  
a Subtitle number indicator  
Shows the subtitle number currently  
selected.  
1 Recall equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer  
2 Display the Functionmenu  
91  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
11  
Playing a DVD-Video  
Touch [m] or [n] to perform fast reverse or  
forward.  
= For details, refer to Using the  
3 Display the DVD menu  
If you touch and hold [m] or [n] for five  
seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues  
even if you release either of these keys. To re-  
sume playback at a desired point, touch  
[f], [m] or [n].  
You can display the menu by touching [Menu]  
or [TOP M.] while a disc is playing. Touching  
either of these keys again lets you start play-  
back from the location selected from the  
menu. For details, refer to the instructions pro-  
vided with the disc.  
f Searching for a desired scene and starting  
playback from a specified time  
p For details, refer to Searching for a speci-  
4 Skip forward or backward  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
chapter. Touching [o] once skips to the  
start of the current chapter. Touching it again  
will skip to the previous chapter.  
p Moving MULTI-CONTROL left or right  
enables you to perform the equivalent  
operations.  
g Perform an operation (such as resuming)  
that is stored on the disc  
When using a DVD that has a point recorded  
that indicates where to return to, the DVD re-  
turns to the specified point and begins play-  
back from that point.  
5 Playback and Pause  
h Change the subtitle (Multi-subtitle)  
Each touch of [S.Title] switches between the  
subtitle languages.  
Touching [f] switches between playback”  
and pause.  
6 Switch the display  
i Change the viewing angle (Multi-angle)  
Each touch of [Angle] switches between view-  
ing angles.  
Touching [Disp] changes the indication on the  
information plate as follows:  
Disc information display Repeat range and  
L/R select display  
p During playback of a scene shot from  
multiple angles, the angle icon  
is  
7 Display the map screen  
displayed. Turn the angle icon display  
on or off using the DVD Setupmenu.  
= For details, refer to Setting the angle icon  
8 Display the DVD menu keypad  
= For details, refer to Using DVD menu by  
9 Switch next page of touch panel keys  
j Change audio language and audio sys-  
a Stop playback  
tems (Multi-audio)  
b Hide the touch panel keys  
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys.  
Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display  
the touch panel keys again.  
c Skip the title forward or backward  
Touching [d] skips to the start of the next title.  
Touching [c] skips to the start of the previous  
title.  
Each touch of [Audio] switches between  
audio languages and audio systems.  
p DTS audio cannot be output, so select  
an audio setting other than DTS.  
p Display indications such as MPEG-A  
and Mch indicate the audio system re-  
corded on the DVD. Depending on the  
setting, playback may not use the same  
audio system as that indicated.  
d Frame-by-frame playback (or slow-motion  
playback)  
k Entering the numerical commands  
= For details, refer to Direct number search  
= For details, refer to Frame-by-frame play-  
= For details, refer to Slow motion playback  
e Fast reverse or forward  
92  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Playing a DVD-Video  
11  
2
Touch the keys to input the target num-  
Resuming playback (Bookmark)  
The Bookmark function lets you resume play-  
back from a selected scene the next time the  
disc is loaded.  
ber or time and then touch [Enter].  
Touching [B.Mark]:  
You can bookmark one point for each of up to  
five discs. If you try to memorize another point  
for the same disc, the oldest bookmark will be  
overwritten by the newest one.  
p To clear the bookmark on a disc, touch and  
hold [B.Mark] during playback.  
Press and hold down the EJECT button:  
You can also bookmark a point for one disc by  
pressing and holding down the EJECT button.  
The next time you load the same disc, play-  
back will resume from the bookmarked point.  
When you newly bookmark a point with this  
method, any previously bookmarked point(s)  
will be overwritten.  
For titles, chapters  
!
!
To select 3, touch [3] and [Enter] in order.  
To select 10, touch [1] and [0] and [Enter] in  
order.  
For time (time search)  
!
To select 5 minutes 03 seconds, touch [5],  
[0], [3] and [Enter] in order.  
!
To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],  
[1], [0], [0] and [Enter] in order.  
p For playback, the point bookmarked  
with this method is given priority over  
the point bookmarked by using  
p To cancel the input numbers, touch [Clear].  
[B.Mark].  
Direct number search  
You can use this function when you need to  
enter a numerical command during DVD play-  
back.  
Searching for a specific scene  
and starting playback from a  
specified time  
1
Touch [0-9].  
You can search for the scene you want by spe-  
cifying a title or a chapter, and the time.  
p Chapter search and time search are not  
possible when disc playback has been  
stopped.  
2
Touch [0] to [9] to input the desired  
number.  
3
While the input number is displayed,  
touch [Enter].  
1
Touch [Search] and then touch [Title]  
(title), [Chapter] (chapter), [Time] (time).  
Operating the DVD menu  
You can operate the DVD menu by touching  
the menu item on the screen directly.  
p This function may not work properly with  
some DVD disc content. In that case, use  
touch panel keys to operate the DVD menu.  
1
Touch the screen to display the touch  
panel keys.  
2
Touch [TOP M.] or [Menu] to display  
touch panel keys to operate the DVD  
menu.  
93  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
11  
Playing a DVD-Video  
p To return to normal playback, touch [f].  
3
Touch the desired menu item.  
2
Touch [q] or [r] to adjust playback  
Using DVD menu by touch panel keys  
speed during slow motion playback.  
Each time you touch [q] or [r] it changes  
the speed in four steps in the following order:  
1/16 f 1/8 f 1/4 f 1/2  
If items on the DVD menu appear at the bot-  
tom of the screen, the touch panel keys may  
overlay them. If so, select an item using those  
touch panel keys.  
p There is no sound during slow motion play-  
back.  
p With some discs, images may be unclear  
during slow motion playback.  
1
Touch [a], [b], [c] or [d] to select the  
desired menu item.  
p Reversed slow motion playback is not possi-  
ble.  
Audio  
Subtitle  
Angle  
Play All  
Chapter  
Using the Functionmenu  
Staff / Cast  
1
Touch [DISC] on the AV Sourcemenu  
to display the DVD-Vscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
2
Touch the screen to display the touch  
p If the touch panel keys for DVD menu selec-  
panel keys.  
tion disappear, touching anywhere on the  
screen, then touching  
again.  
displays them  
3
Touch [Func].  
2
Touch [Enter].  
Playback starts from the selected menu item.  
The way to display the menu differs depending  
on the disc.  
Frame-by-frame playback  
This lets you move ahead one frame at a time  
during playback.  
1
2
3
%
Touch [r] during playback.  
1 Repeating play  
Each time you touch [r], you move ahead  
one frame.  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
To return to normal playback, touch [f].  
p With some discs, images may be unclear  
during frame-by-frame playback.  
!
!
Title Repeats just the current title  
Chapter Repeats just the current  
chapter  
!
Disc Plays throughout the current  
disc  
Slow motion playback  
This lets you slow down playback speed.  
p If you perform chapter (title) search, fast  
forward/rewind or slow motion playback,  
the repeat play range changes to [Disc].  
2 Selecting audio output  
1
Touch and hold [r] until  
played during playback.  
The icon is displayed, and forward slow  
is dis-  
motion playback begins.  
94  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing a DVD-Video  
11  
When playing DVDs recorded with LPCM  
audio, you can switch the audio output.  
Touch [L/R Select] repeatedly until the de-  
sired audio output appears in the display.  
Each touch of [L/R Select] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
!
!
!
!
L+R Left and right  
L Left  
R Right  
Mix Mixing left and right  
p This function is not available when disc  
playback has been stopped.  
3 DVD setup adjustments  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD  
95  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
12  
Playing a DVD-VR disc  
You can play a DVD-VR (DVD Video Recording  
Format) disc using the built-in drive of the na-  
vigation system. This section describes opera-  
tions for DVD-VR discs.  
Using the touch panel keys  
Playback screen (page1)  
1
2
p AVIC-X7115BT cannot play DVD-VR discs.  
3
Reading the screen  
4
5
2
4 5  
1
3
7
8
6
6
7
8
9
9 a b c  
1
Playback screen (page2)  
2
d
e
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Audio track indicator  
f
g
Shows the audio track number currently se-  
lected.  
3 Title number indicator  
h
7
8
Shows the title number currently playing.  
4 Audio channel indicator  
Shows the current audio channel type, such  
as Mch(Multi-channel).  
5 Chapter number indicator  
Shows the chapter currently playing.  
6 Play mode indicator  
i a  
c
p With some discs, the icon 9 may be dis-  
played, meaning that the operation is not  
valid.  
1 Recall equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer  
Shows the current play mode.  
= For details, refer to Switch the play-  
2 Display the Functionmenu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
3 c CM Back/CM Skip d  
= For details, refer to Using the short-  
4 Switch the playback mode  
= For details, refer to Switch the play-  
7 Digital sound format indicator  
Shows which digital sound format (surround  
sound format) has been selected.  
8 Play time indicator  
Shows the elapsed playing time within the  
current title.  
9 Mixing condition indicator  
Shows the current mixing condition.  
5 Skip forward or backward  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
chapter. Touching [o] once skips to the  
start of the current chapter. Touching it again  
will skip to the previous chapter.  
96  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing a DVD-VR disc  
12  
i Searching for a desired scene and starting  
playback from a specified time  
p Moving MULTI-CONTROL left or right  
enables you to perform the equivalent  
operations.  
= For details, refer to Searching for a speci-  
6 Playback and Pause  
Touching [f] switches between playback”  
and pause.  
7 Switch the display  
Searching for a specific scene  
and starting playback from a  
specified time  
You can search for the scene you want by spe-  
cifying a title or a chapter, and the time.  
p Chapter search and time search are not  
possible when disc playback has been  
stopped.  
Touching [Disp] changes the information as  
follows:  
Disc information display Repeat range dis-  
play  
8 Display the map screen  
9 Display the title list  
Displays the title list recorded on the disc.  
a Switch next page of touch panel keys  
b Stop playback  
c Hide the touch panel keys  
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys.  
Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display  
the touch panel keys again.  
1
Touch [Search] and then touch [Title]  
(title), [Chapter] (chapter), [Time] (time).  
d Change audio tracks (Multi-audio)  
Each touch of [Audio] switches between  
audio tracks.  
p Display indications such as MPEG-A  
and Mch indicate the audio system re-  
corded on the DVD. Depending on the  
setting, playback may not use the same  
audio system as that indicated.  
e Skip the title forward or backward  
Touching [d] skips to the start of the next title.  
Touching [c] skips to the start of the previous  
title.  
2
Touch the keys to input the target num-  
ber or time and then touch [Enter].  
f Change the subtitle (Multi-subtitle)  
Each touch of [S.Title] switches between the  
subtitle languages.  
g Frame-by-frame playback (or slow-motion  
playback)  
= For details, refer to Frame-by-frame play-  
= For details, refer to Slow motion playback  
h Fast reverse or forward  
For titles, chapters  
Touch [m] or [n] to perform fast reverse or  
forward.  
!
!
To select 3, touch [3] and [Enter] in order.  
To select 10, touch [1] and [0] and [Enter] in  
order.  
If you touch and hold [m] or [n] for five  
seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues  
even if you release either of these keys. To re-  
sume playback at a desired point, touch  
[f], [m] or [n].  
For time (time search)  
!
To select 5 minutes 03 seconds, touch [5],  
[0], [3] and [Enter] in order.  
97  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
12  
Playing a DVD-VR disc  
!
To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],  
[1], [0], [0] and [Enter] in order.  
2
Touch the title to play from the list.  
p To cancel the input numbers, touch [Clear].  
Switch the playback mode  
You have two methods for playing DVD-VR  
discs; Original (original) and Playlist (play-  
list).  
p Titles created with DVD recorders are  
called original. Those based on original, re-  
arranged titles are called playlist. Playlists  
are created on DVD-R/-RW discs.  
p Touching or switches the selection to  
the next or previous page in the list.  
%
Touch [Mode Change] to switch the  
play mode.  
3
To return to the previous screen, touch  
[List].  
If the play mode is changed, playback starts  
from the beginning of the selected play mode.  
Frame-by-frame playback  
This lets you move ahead one frame at a time  
during playback.  
Using the short-time skip function  
This function enables you to skip over your  
specified interval on the video playback. This  
is useful to skip commercials on your recorded  
DVD-VR disc.  
%
Touch [r] during playback.  
Each time you touch [r], you move ahead  
one frame.  
To return to normal playback, touch [f].  
p With some discs, images may be unclear  
during frame-by-frame playback.  
%
To skip progressively backward or for-  
ward, touch [c CM Back] or [CM Skip d].  
Each touch of [c CM Back] or [CM Skip d]  
changes steps in the following order:  
c CM Back  
Slow motion playback  
This lets you slow down playback speed.  
5 sec. 15 sec. 30 sec. 1 min. 2 min.  
3 min. 0 sec.  
CM Skip d  
1
Touch and hold [r] until  
played during playback.  
The icon is displayed, and forward slow  
is dis-  
30 sec. 1 min. 1.5 min. 2 min. 3 min.  
5 min. 10 min. 0 sec.  
motion playback begins.  
p To return to normal playback, touch [n]  
or [m], etc.  
Playing by selecting from the  
title list  
You can select and play the title you want from  
2
Touch [r] to adjust playback speed  
during slow motion playback.  
Each touch of [r] changes the speed in four  
steps as below:  
1/16 d 1/8 d 1/4 d 1/2  
p There is no sound during slow motion play-  
back.  
the list.  
1
Touch [List] on the playback screen.  
p With some discs, images may be unclear  
during slow motion playback.  
p Reversed slow motion playback is not possi-  
ble.  
98  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing a DVD-VR disc  
12  
Using the Functionmenu  
1
Touch [DISC] on the AV Sourcemenu  
to display the DVD-VRscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
2
Touch the screen to display the touch  
panel keys.  
3
Touch [Func].  
Function menu  
1
2
3
1 Repeating play  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
!
!
Title Repeats just the current title  
Chapter Repeats just the current  
chapter  
!
Disc Plays throughout the current  
disc  
p If you perform chapter (title) search, fast  
forward/rewind or slow motion playback,  
the repeat play range changes to [Disc].  
2 Selecting audio output  
When playing DVDs recorded with LPCM  
audio, you can switch the audio output.  
Touch [L/R Select] repeatedly until the de-  
sired audio output appears in the display.  
!
!
!
!
L+R Left and right  
L Left  
R Right  
Mix Mixing left and right  
p This function is not available when disc  
playback has been stopped.  
3 DVD setup adjustments  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD  
99  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
13  
Playing a DivX video  
You can play a DivX disc using the built-in  
drive of the navigation system. This section de-  
scribes that operations.  
Using the touch panel keys  
Playback screen (page1)  
1
2
p AVIC-X7115BT cannot play DivX files.  
Reading the screen  
3
4
12  
3
45  
6 7  
8
5
6
7
9
8 9 a b  
1
Playback screen (page2)  
2
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Audio track indicator  
c
3
d
e
Shows the audio track number currently se-  
lected.  
f
6
7
3 Folder number indicator  
Shows the folder number currently playing.  
4 Audio channel indicator  
Shows the current audio channel type, such  
as Mch(Multi-channel).  
g 9  
b
p With some discs, the icon 9 may be dis-  
played, meaning that the operation is not  
valid.  
5 File number indicator  
Shows the file number currently playing.  
6 Subtitle number indicator  
Shows the subtitle number currently selected.  
7 Digital sound format indicator  
Shows the digital sound format (surround  
sound format) currently selected.  
8 Play time indicator  
Shows the elapsed playing time of the current  
file.  
9 Repeat range indicator  
1 Recall equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer  
2 Display the Functionmenu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
3 Select the previous or next folder  
Touch [c] or [d] to select the desired folder.  
4 Skip forward or backward  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
file. Touching [o] once skips to the start of  
the current file. Touching again will skip to the  
previous file.  
Shows which repeat range has been  
selected.  
p Moving MULTI-CONTROL left or right  
enables you to perform the equivalent  
operations.  
5 Playback and Pause  
Touching [f] switches between playback”  
and pause.  
100  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing a DivX video  
13  
6 Switch the information  
Frame-by-frame playback  
This lets you move ahead one frame at a time  
during playback.  
Touching [Disp] changes the content of the in-  
formation panel as follows:  
Disc information display Current folder dis-  
play File name display  
%
Touch [r] during playback.  
7 Display the map screen  
Each time you touch [r], you move ahead  
one frame.  
8 Switch the media file type played  
When playing a disc containing a mixture of  
various media file types, you can switch be-  
tween media files types to play.  
To return to normal playback, touch [f].  
p With some discs, images may be unclear  
during frame-by-frame playback.  
Touch [Media] repeatedly to switch between  
the following media file types:  
Slow motion playback  
This lets you slow down playback speed.  
CD (audio data (CD-DA)) ROM (com-  
pressed audio file) DivX (DivX video files)  
p This touch panel key appears only when  
playing a disc containing a mixture of  
various media file types.  
%
Touch and hold [r] until  
played during playback.  
The icon is displayed, and forward slow  
is dis-  
9 Switch next page of touch panel keys  
a Stop playback  
b Hide the touch panel keys  
motion playback begins.  
p To return to normal playback, touch [n]  
or [m], etc.  
p There is no sound during slow motion play-  
back.  
p With some discs, images may be unclear  
during slow motion playback.  
p Reversed slow motion playback is not possi-  
ble.  
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys.  
Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display  
the touch panel keys again.  
c Change audio tracks (Multi-audio)  
Each touch of [Audio] switches between  
audio tracks.  
d Change the subtitle (Multi-subtitle)  
Each touch of [S.Title] switches between the  
subtitle languages.  
Searching for a specific scene  
and starting playback from a  
specified time  
You can search for a desired scene by specify-  
ing a folder or a file, and the time.  
e Frame-by-frame playback (or slow-motion  
playback)  
= For details, refer to Frame-by-frame play-  
= For details, refer to Slow motion playback  
f Fast reverse or forward  
p Time search are not possible when disc  
playback has been stopped.  
Touch [m] or [n] to perform fast reverse or  
forward.  
1
Touch [Search] and then touch [Folder]  
(folder), [File] (file), [Time] (time).  
If you touch and hold [m] or [n] for five  
seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues  
even if you release either of these keys. To re-  
sume playback at a desired point, touch  
[f], [m] or [n].  
g Searching for a desired scene and starting  
playback from a specified time  
= For details, refer to Searching for a speci-  
101  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
13  
Playing a DivX video  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
2
Touch the keys to input the target num-  
ber or time and then touch [Enter].  
!
!
!
File Repeat just the current file  
Folder Repeat just the current folder  
Disc Plays throughout the current  
disc  
p If you select another folder during repeat  
play, the repeat play range changes to  
[Disc].  
p If you perform fast forward/rewind dur-  
ing [File], the repeat play range changes  
to [Folder].  
p When [Folder] is selected, it is not pos-  
sible to play back a subfolder of that  
folder.  
For folders, files  
!
!
To select 3, touch [3] and [Enter] in order.  
To select 10, touch [1] and [0] and [Enter] in  
order.  
p When playing discs with compressed  
audio files and audio data (CD-DA), re-  
peat play is performed within DivX vi-  
deos even if [Disc] is selected.  
2 DVD setup adjustments  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD  
For time (time search)  
!
To select 5 minutes 03 seconds, touch [5],  
[0], [3] and [Enter] in order.  
!
To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],  
[1], [0], [0] and [Enter] in order.  
p To cancel the input numbers, touch  
[Clear].  
Using the Functionmenu  
1
Touch [DISC] on the AV Sourcemenu  
to display the DivXscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
2
Touch the screen to display the touch  
panel keys.  
3
Touch [Func].  
Function menu  
1
2
1 Repeating play  
102  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DivX setup  
14  
Configure the DVD-Video/DVD-VR/DivX player.  
1
Touch [DVD Setup] on the Function”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD Setup  
Displaying DVD Setup menu  
2
Touch [Language].  
1
Play the disc that contains DVD-Video,  
You can select the language preference of the  
subtitle, audio, and menus.  
DVD-VR or DivX.  
2
Touch [DISC] on the AV Sourcemenu  
3
Touch the key next to [Subtitle Lan-  
to display the normal playback screen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
guage], [Audio Language] or [Menu Lan-  
guage].  
Each language menu is displayed and the cur-  
rently set language is selected.  
3
Touch [Func].  
The Functionmenu appears.  
4
Touch the desired language.  
4
Touch [DVD Setup].  
When you select [Others], a language code  
input display is shown. Input the four digit  
code of the desired language then touch  
[Enter].  
p If the selected language is not recorded on  
the disc, the default language specified on  
the disc is output and displayed.  
p You can also switch the subtitle and audio  
language by touching [S.Title] or [Audio]  
during playback.  
p Even if you use [S.Title] or [Audio] to  
switch the subtitle or audio language, this  
does not affect the settings here.  
5
Touch the desired function.  
Setting assist subtitles on  
or off  
Assist subtitles offer explanations for the au-  
rally impaired. However, they are only dis-  
played if they are recorded on the DVD.  
You can turn assist subtitles on or off as de-  
sired.  
1
Touch [DVD Setup] on the Function”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD Setup  
Setting the top-priority  
languages  
You can assign the top-priority language to the  
top-priority subtitle, audio and menu in initial  
playback. If the selected language is recorded  
on the disc, subtitles, audio and menu are dis-  
played or output in that language.  
2
Touch [Assist Subtitle].  
Touching [Assist Subtitle] switches between  
[On] and [Off].  
103  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
14  
DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DivX setup  
Setting the parental lock  
Setting the angle icon display  
You can set the angle icon  
to display in  
Some DVD-Video discs let you use parental  
lock to set restrictions so that children cannot  
watch violent or adult-oriented scenes. You  
can set the parental lock level in steps as de-  
sired.  
p When you set a parental lock level and then  
play a disc featuring parental lock, code  
number input indications may be dis-  
played. In this case, playback will begin  
when the correct code number is input.  
scenes where the angle can be switched.  
1
Touch [DVD Setup] on the Function”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD Setup  
2
Touch [Multi Angle].  
Touching [Multi Angle] switches between  
[On] and [Off].  
Setting the code number and level  
When you first use this function, register your  
code number. If you do not register a code  
number, parental lock will not operate.  
Setting the aspect ratio  
There are two kinds of displays. A wide screen  
display has a width-to-height ratio (TV aspect)  
of 16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect  
of 4:3. If you use a regular rear display with a  
TV aspect of 4:3, you can set the aspect ratio  
suitable for your rear display. (We recommend  
use of this function only when you want to fit it  
to the rear display.)  
1
Touch [DVD Setup] on the Function”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD Setup  
2
3
4
Touch [Parental].  
p When using a regular display, select either  
Letter Boxor Panscan. Selecting  
Touch the key next to Parental.  
Touch [0] to [9] to input a four digit  
16:09may result in an unnatural picture.  
1
Touch [DVD Setup] on the Function”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD Setup  
code number.  
5
While the input number is displayed,  
touch [Enter].  
The code number is registered, and you can  
now set the level.  
2
Touch [TV Aspect].  
Each touch of [TV Aspect] changes the setting  
6
Touch any of [1] to [8] to select the de-  
as follows:  
sired level.  
The parental lock level is set.  
!
!
16:09 Wide screen picture (16:9) is dis-  
played as it is (initial setting)  
Letter Box The picture is in the shape of  
a letter box with black bands at the top and  
bottom of the screen  
!
!
Level 8 Playback of the entire disc is  
possible (initial setting)  
Level 7 to Level 2 Playback of discs for  
children and non-adult oriented discs is  
possible  
!
Panscan The picture is cut short at the  
right and left of the screen  
!
Level 1 Only playback of discs for chil-  
dren is possible  
p When playing discs that do not have a pan-  
scan system, the disc is played back with  
[Letter Box] even if you select [Panscan]  
setting. Confirm whether the disc package  
p If you want to change the parental level al-  
ready set, enter the registered code number  
and then select the parental level.  
p We recommend that you keep a record of  
your code number in case you forget it.  
bears the  
mark.  
p Some discs do not enable changing of the  
TV aspect. For details, refer to the discs in-  
structions.  
104  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DivX setup  
14  
p The parental lock level is recorded on the  
disc. You can confirm it by looking at the  
disc package, the included literature or the  
disc itself. You cannot use parental lock  
with discs that do not feature a recorded  
parental lock level.  
p With some discs, parental lock operates to  
skip certain scenes only, after which normal  
playback resumes. For details, refer to the  
discs instructions.  
1
Touch [DVD Setup] on the Function”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD Setup  
2
Touch [Auto Play].  
Touching [Auto Play] switches this setting be-  
tween [On] and [Off].  
p When [Auto Play] is [On], repeat play can-  
not be used.  
p If you forget the registered code number,  
touch [Clear] 10 times on the number input  
screen. The registered code number is can-  
celed, letting you register a new one.  
Displaying your DivX VOD  
registration code  
In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand)  
content on this navigation system, you first  
need to register the unit with your DivX VOD  
content provider. You do this by generating a  
DivX VOD registration code, which you submit  
to your provider.  
1
Touch [DVD Setup] on the Function”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD Setup  
2
Touch [DivX VOD].  
Your 8-digit registration code is displayed.  
p Make a note of the code as you will need it  
when you register with a DivX VOD  
provider.  
Setting Auto Play”  
When a DVD disc with DVD menu is inserted,  
this unit will cancel the DVD menu automati-  
cally and start playback from the first chapter  
of the first title.  
p This function is available for DVD-Video.  
p Some DVDs may not operate properly. If  
this function is not fully operable, turn this  
function off and start playback.  
105  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
14  
DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DivX setup  
Setting the subtitle file for  
DivX  
You can select whether to display DivX exter-  
nal subtitles or not.  
p If no DivX external subtitle files exist, the  
original DivX subtitles are displayed even  
when [Custom] is selected.  
1
Touch [DVD Setup] on the Function”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD Setup  
2
Touch [Subtitle File].  
Touching [Subtitle File] switches this setting  
between [Original] and [Custom].  
p Up to 42 characters can be displayed on  
one line. If more than 42 characters are set,  
the line breaks and the characters are dis-  
played on the next line.  
p Up to 126 characters can be displayed on  
one screen. If more than 126 characters are  
set, the excess characters will not be dis-  
played.  
p The DivX subtitles will be displayed even  
when the subtitle file setting is on if no cor-  
responding subtitle files exist.  
p Up to three lines can be displayed at  
once.  
106  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DivX setup  
Language code chart for DVDs  
14  
Language (code), input code  
Japanese (ja), 1001  
English (en), 0514  
French (fr), 0618  
Spanish (es), 0519  
German (de), 0405  
Italian (it), 0920  
Language (code), input code  
Guarani (gn), 0714  
Gujarati (gu), 0721  
Hausa (ha), 0801  
Language (code), input code  
Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619  
Quechua (qu), 1721  
Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813  
Kirundi (rn), 1814  
Rumanian (ro), 1815  
Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823  
Sanskrit (sa), 1901  
Sindhi (sd), 1904  
Hindi (hi), 0809  
Croatian (hr), 0818  
Hungarian (hu), 0821  
Armenian (hy), 0825  
Interlingua (ia), 0901  
Interlingue (ie), 0905  
Inupiak (ik), 0911  
Indonesian (in), 0914  
Icelandic (is), 0919  
Hebrew (iw), 0923  
Yiddish (ji), 1009  
Javanese (jw), 1023  
Georgian (ka), 1101  
Kazakh (kk), 1111  
Greenlandic (kl), 1112  
Cambodian (km), 1113  
Kannada (kn), 1114  
Kashmiri (ks), 1119  
Kurdish (ku), 1121  
Kirghiz (ky), 1125  
Chinese (zh), 2608  
Dutch (nl), 1412  
Portuguese (pt), 1620  
Swedish (sv), 1922  
Russian (ru), 1821  
Korean (ko), 1115  
Greek (el), 0512  
Sango (sg), 1907  
Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908  
Shinghalese (si), 1909  
Slovak (sk), 1911  
Slovenian (sl), 1912  
Samoan (sm), 1913  
Shona (sn), 1914  
Somali (so), 1915  
Albanian (sq), 1917  
Serbian (sr), 1918  
Siswati (ss), 1919  
Sesotho (st), 1920  
Sundanese (su), 1921  
Swahili (sw), 1923  
Tamil (ta), 2001  
Afar (aa), 0101  
Abkhazian (ab), 0102  
Afrikaans (af), 0106  
Amharic (am), 0113  
Arabic (ar), 0118  
Assamese (as), 0119  
Aymara (ay), 0125  
Azerbaijani (az), 0126  
Bashkir (ba), 0201  
Belorussian (be), 0205  
Bulgarian (bg), 0207  
Bihari (bh), 0208  
Latin (la), 1201  
Lingala (ln), 1214  
Telugu (te), 2005  
Tajik (tg), 2007  
Bislama (bi), 0209  
Bengali, Bangla (bn), 0214  
Tibetan (bo), 0215  
Breton (br), 0218  
Catalan (ca), 0301  
Corsican (co), 0315  
Czech (cs), 0319  
Laotian (lo), 1215  
Thai (th), 2008  
Lithuanian (lt), 1220  
Latvian, Lettish (lv), 1222  
Malagasy (mg), 1307  
Maori (mi), 1309  
Macedonian (mk), 1311  
Malayalam (ml), 1312  
Mongolian (mn), 1314  
Moldavian (mo), 1315  
Marathi (mr), 1318  
Malay (ms), 1319  
Tigrinya (ti), 2009  
Turkmen (tk), 2011  
Tagalog (tl), 2012  
Setswana (tn), 2014  
Tongan (to), 2015  
Turkish (tr), 2018  
Tsonga (ts), 2019  
Tatar (tt), 2020  
Twi (tw), 2023  
Ukrainian (uk), 2111  
Urdu (ur), 2118  
Welsh (cy), 0325  
Danish (da), 0401  
Bhutani (dz), 0426  
Esperanto (eo), 0515  
Estonian (et), 0520  
Basque (eu), 0521  
Persian (fa), 0601  
Finnish (fi), 0609  
Fiji (fj), 0610  
Faroese (fo), 0615  
Frisian (fy), 0625  
Maltese (mt), 1320  
Burmese (my), 1325  
Nauru (na), 1401  
Uzbek (uz), 2126  
Vietnamese (vi), 2209  
Volapük (vo), 2215  
Wolof (wo), 2315  
Xhosa (xh), 2408  
Yoruba (yo), 2515  
Zulu (zu), 2621  
Nepali (ne), 1405  
Norwegian (no), 1415  
Occitan (oc), 1503  
Oromo (om), 1513  
Oriya (or), 1518  
Irish (ga), 0701  
Scottish Gaelic (gd), 0704  
Galician (gl), 0712  
Panjabi (pa), 1601  
Polish (pl), 1612  
107  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
15  
Playing music files (from USB or SD)  
p Playback is performed in order of folder  
You can play the compressed audio files  
stored in the external storage device (USB,  
SD).  
p In the following description, the SD mem-  
ory card and USB memory device are col-  
lectively referred to as the external storage  
device (USB, SD). If it indicates the USB  
memory device only, it is referred to as the  
USB storage device.  
p When SDor USBis selected as the AV  
source, the AV sounds, the navigation gui-  
dance and beep sounds are mixed and the  
volume can be adjusted simultaneously.  
number. Folders are skipped if they con-  
tains no playable files. (If there are no play-  
able files in folder 001 (root folder),  
playback starts from folder 002.)  
Reading the screen  
12  
3
45  
6
7
Important Notice regarding Volume of  
Navigation Voice Guidance when  
Playing Audio Files from USB or SD  
If music files stored on an external storage de-  
vice (USB, SD) are played when the system  
guides the route (i.e., a destination has been  
selected and the system is routing you to a  
destination), the volume of the navigation gui-  
dance voice will be the same as the volume of  
the music files being played, even if a different  
volume level has been selected on Master”  
or Voiceor Dynamic Volumein the  
Sound settingsmenu.  
8
9
a
b
p This unit may not achieve optimum perfor-  
mance with some external storage devices.  
p You can playback the files on a USB sto-  
rage device compliant with Mass Storage  
Class. For details about the USB Class,  
refer to the manual supplied with USB sto-  
rage device.  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Folder number indicator  
3 Track number indicator  
Starting procedure  
%
Insert the SD memory card into the SD  
4 Play time indicator  
card slot or plug the USB storage device  
Shows the elapsed playing time within the  
current track.  
5 File type indicator  
into the USB connector.  
The source changes and then playback will  
start if there is a playable file on the external  
storage device.  
= For details, refer to Plugging in a USB sto-  
= For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting an  
p If the external storage device is already set,  
touch [USB] or [SD] on the AV Source”  
menu.  
Shows the type of audio file currently playing.  
6 Current folder name indicator  
Shows the folder name currently playing.  
7 Current file number and total number of  
files  
Shows the file number currently played and  
the total number of playable audio files.  
8 Track title indicator*  
Shows the title of the track currently playing  
(when available).  
9 Artist name indicator*  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
108  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing music files (from USB or SD)  
15  
Shows the artist name currently playing  
(when available).  
a Album title indicator*  
Using the touch panel keys  
(Music)  
Shows the title of the album for the current  
track (when available).  
1
2
b Playback condition indicator  
The marks shown below appears and indi-  
cates the current playback condition.  
3
4
5
6
: Scan play  
: Random play  
: Repeat play  
7
Indicator  
Meaning  
1 Recall equalizer curves  
All audio files in the current  
external storage device  
(USB, SD) are played repeat-  
edly. This is the default con-  
dition.  
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer  
Media Repeat  
2 Display the Functionmenu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
3 Switch the operation screen  
Touching this key switches between the  
screen to operate music files and the screen  
to operate video files. This touch panel key is  
available only when there are both audio and  
video files in the external storage device (USB,  
SD).  
The current folder is played  
repeatedly.  
Folder Repeat  
Track Repeat  
The current file is played re-  
peatedly.  
All audio files in the current  
external storage device  
(USB, SD) are played in ran-  
dom order.  
Media Random  
4 Select the previous or next folder  
Touching [c] or [d] play the first playable file  
on the previous or next folder. The folders that  
there is no playable files are skipped.  
5 Skip forward or backward  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
file. Touching [o] once skips to the start of  
the current file. Touching again will skip to the  
previous file.  
All audio files in the current  
folder are played in random  
order.  
Folder Random  
Media Scan  
The beginning of each audio  
file is played for about 10  
seconds.  
The beginning of each track  
in the current folder is  
played for about 10 seconds.  
Folder Scan  
Fast reverse or forward  
Touch and hold [o] or [p] to fast rewind  
or fast forward.  
p There is no sound on fast reverse or for-  
ward.  
p Moving MULTI-CONTROL left or right  
enables you to perform the equivalent  
operations.  
= For more information, refer to Using the  
p The information marked with an asterisk (*)  
is displayed only when the information has  
been encoded on the compressed audio  
files. If specific information has not been  
encoded on the files, “—” is displayed in-  
stead.  
6 Playback and Pause  
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
7 Display the map screen  
109  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
15  
Playing music files (from USB or SD)  
p If the information has not been recorded on  
Selecting a track from the list  
files, nothing may be displayed.  
p For WAV files, only the information marked  
with (*) can be displayed.  
p If the characters recorded on the com-  
pressed audio file are not compatible with  
this navigation system, those characters  
may turn into garbled characters.  
The list lets you see the list of track titles or  
folder names on an external storage device  
(USB, SD). Touch a folder on the list to view its  
contents. Touch a track on the list to play that  
track.  
1
2
Touch [List].  
Touch the folder that you want to view.  
Using the Functionmenu  
1
Touch [USB] or [SD] on the AV Source”  
menu to display the USBor SDscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
2
Touch [Func].  
The track currently playing is highlighted.  
Touching or switches the selection to the  
next or previous page in the list.  
Touching  
folder (parent folder). If the uppermost folder  
is listed, cannot be used.  
displays the content of the upper  
p If the selected folder does not contain any  
playable track, the track list is not dis-  
played.  
1
2
3
1 Repeating play  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
3
Touch the track you want to play.  
p To cancel the list screen, touch [Detail].  
!
Media Repeat all compressed audio  
files in the selected external storage de-  
vice (USB, SD)  
Browsing embedded text  
information  
Text information recorded in a compressed  
audio file can be displayed.  
!
!
Track Repeat just the current track  
Folder Repeat the current folder  
p If you skip the file forward or backward  
when the repeat play range in Track,  
the repeat play range changes to  
Folder.  
%
Touch  
.
The next piece of information is displayed.  
2 Play tracks in a random order  
Random play lets you playback tracks in  
random order within the current repeat  
range.  
!
!
!
!
!
Album Title : (album title)*  
Track Title : (track title)*  
Folder Title : (folder title)  
File Name : (file name)  
Touching [Random] switches between On”  
and Off.  
Artist Name : (artist name)*  
110  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing music files (from USB or SD)  
15  
p If you turn [Random] to Onwhile the  
repeat play range is set to Track, the  
repeat play range changes to Folder”  
automatically.  
3 Scan folders and tracks  
Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds  
of each track. Scan play is performed in the  
current repeat play range.  
Touching [Scan] switches between On”  
and Off. When you find the track you  
want, touch [Scan] to turn scan play off.  
p After all tracks or folders scanning are  
finished, normal playback will begin  
again.  
p If you turn [Scan] to Onwhile the re-  
peat play range is set to Track, the re-  
peat play range changes to Folder”  
automatically.  
111  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
16  
Playing video files (from USB or SD)  
able files in folder 001 (root folder),  
playback starts from folder 002.)  
You can play the video files stored in the exter-  
nal storage device (USB, SD).  
p In the following description, the SD mem-  
ory card and USB memory device are col-  
lectively referred to as the external storage  
device (USB, SD). If it indicates the USB  
memory device only, it is referred to as the  
USB storage device.  
Reading the screen  
45  
12  
3
p When SDor USBis selected as the AV  
source, the AV sounds, the navigation gui-  
dance and beep sounds are mixed and the  
volume can be adjusted simultaneously.  
6
Important Notice regarding Volume of  
Navigation Voice Guidance when  
Playing Audio Files from USB or SD  
If music files stored on an external storage de-  
vice (USB, SD) are played when the system  
guides the route (i.e., a destination has been  
selected and the system is routing you to a  
destination), the volume of the navigation gui-  
dance voice will be the same as the volume of  
the music files being played, even if a different  
volume level has been selected on Master”  
or Voiceor Dynamic Volumein the  
Sound settingsmenu.  
p This unit may not achieve optimum perfor-  
mance with some external storage devices.  
p You can playback the files on a USB sto-  
rage device compliant with Mass Storage  
Class. For details about the USB Class,  
refer to the manual supplied with USB sto-  
rage device.  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Folder number indicator  
3 File number indicator  
4 Play time indicator  
Shows the elapsed playing time within the  
current track.  
5 File type indicator  
Shows the type of audio file currently playing.  
6 Current folder name indicator  
Shows the folder name currently playing.  
Starting procedure  
%
Insert the SD memory card into the SD  
card slot or plug the USB storage device  
into the USB connector.  
The source changes and then playback will  
start if there is a playable file on the external  
storage device.  
= For details, refer to Plugging in a USB sto-  
= For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting an  
p If the external storage device is already set,  
touch [USB] or [SD] on the AV Source”  
menu.  
p Playback is performed in order of folder  
number. Folders are skipped if they con-  
tains no playable files. (If there are no play-  
112  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing video files (from USB or SD)  
16  
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
7 Display the map screen  
Using the touch panel keys  
(Video)  
8 Searching for a desired scene and starting  
playback from a specified time  
= For details, refer to Searching for a speci-  
1
2
3
4
9 Stop playback  
5
6
a Hide the touch panel keys  
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys.  
Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display  
the touch panel keys again.  
7
8
9 a  
1 Recall equalizer curves  
Searching for a specific scene  
and starting playback from a  
specified time  
You can search for a desired scene by specify-  
ing a folder number, file number or the time.  
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer  
2 Display the Functionmenu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
3 Switch the operation screen  
Touching this key switches between the  
screen to operate music files and the screen  
to operate video files. This touch panel key is  
available only when there are both audio and  
video files in the external storage device (USB,  
SD).  
1
Touch [Search] and then touch [Folder],  
[File] or [Time].  
4 Select the previous or next folder  
Touching [c] or [d] play the first playable file  
on the previous or next folder. The folders that  
there is no playable files are skipped.  
5 Skip forward or backward  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
file. Touching [o] once skips to the start of  
the current file. Touching again will skip to the  
previous file.  
2
Touch the keys to input the target num-  
ber or time and then touch [Enter].  
Fast reverse or forward  
Touch and hold [o] or [p] to fast rewind  
or fast forward.  
p There is no sound on fast reverse or for-  
ward.  
p Moving MULTI-CONTROL left or right  
enables you to perform the equivalent  
operations.  
6 Playback and Pause  
113  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
16  
Playing video files (from USB or SD)  
repeat play range changes to  
Folder.  
For folders, files  
!
!
To select 3, touch [3] and [Enter] in order.  
To select 10, touch [1] and [0] and [Enter] in  
order.  
For time (time search)  
!
To select 5 minutes 03 seconds, touch [5],  
[0], [3] and [Enter] in order.  
!
To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],  
[1], [0], [0] and [Enter] in order.  
p To clear the input numbers, touch  
[Clear].  
Using the Functionmenu  
1
Touch [USB] or [SD] on the AV Source”  
menu to display the USBor SDscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
2
Touch the screen to display the touch  
panel keys.  
3
Touch [Func].  
p If the touch panel keys are not shown,  
touch anywhere on the screen to display  
them.  
1
1 Repeating play  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
!
Media Repeat all video files in the se-  
lected external storage device (USB, SD)  
File Repeat just the current file  
!
!
Folder Repeat the current folder  
p If you skip the file forward or backward  
when the repeat play range in File, the  
114  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using an iPod (iPod)  
17  
Using the USB interface cable for iPod en-  
ables you to connect your iPod to the naviga-  
tion system.  
Video  
1
p A USB interface cable for iPod (CD-IU230V)  
(sold separately) is required for connection.  
a
Starting procedure  
%
Connect your iPod.  
The source changes and then playback will  
start.  
1 Source icon  
= For details, refer to Connecting your iPod on  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Shuffle play indicator  
Appears when shuffle play is activated.  
3 Repeat play indicator  
Appears when repeat play is activated.  
: All-tracks repeat  
p If the iPod is already connected, touch  
[iPod] on the AV Sourcemenu.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
p No sound or video output if iPod is selected  
as AV source, check the setting in AV1  
Inputon the AV System Settingsmenu.  
= For details, refer to Setting video input 1  
: One-track repeat  
4 Album artwork  
Album art of the current song is displayed if it  
is available.  
5 Song title (episode) indicator  
Shows the title of the current song. When a  
podcast is played, the episode is displayed.  
6 Artist name (podcast title) indicator  
Shows the artist name currently playing.  
When a podcast is played, the podcast title is  
displayed.  
Reading the screen  
Music  
1
23  
7 Album title (release date) indicator  
Shows the title of the album for the song.  
When a podcast is played, the release date is  
displayed.  
4
8 Play time indicator  
5
6
7
Shows the elapsed playing time within the  
current song.  
9 Song number indicator  
Shows the number of the song currently play-  
ing and total number of songs in the selected  
list.  
8
9
a Chapter number indicator  
Shows the current chapter number and total  
number of chapters when the video with chap-  
ters played.  
115  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
17  
Using an iPod (iPod)  
the song using the category tabs to play,  
touching the key displays the previous list.  
7 Skip back or forward to another song  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
song. Touching [o] once skips to the start  
of the current song. Touching again will skip  
to the previous song. When the track with  
chapters played, chapter can be skipped back  
and forward.  
p If characters recorded on the iPod are not  
compatible with this navigation system,  
they may turn into garbled characters.  
Using the touch panel keys  
(Music)  
1
2
3
4
Fast reverse or forward  
Touch and hold [o] or [p] to fast rewind  
or fast forward.  
5
6
7
p Moving MULTI-CONTROL left or right  
enables you to perform the equivalent  
operations.  
8
9
8 Playback and Pause  
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
a
9 Display the map screen  
a Shuffle All  
1 Album artwork  
All songs (except for the track in Audio-  
booksand Podcasts) in your iPod can be  
played randomly.  
p To cancel the random play, switch  
[Shuffle] on the Functionmenu to the  
Off.  
Touch the key to enlarge the album artwork. If  
you touch again, the artwork returns to its nor-  
mal size.  
2 Category tabs  
Shows the list to narrow down the songs. If  
you want to use the list of Audiobooks,  
Composersor Songs, touch [Menu] to  
display the lists.  
Browsing for a song  
Touch an item on list to search for a song and  
play it on your iPod.  
3 Recall equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer  
4 Display the Functionmenu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
5 Switch the operation screen  
Touching this key switches between the  
screen to operate music files and the screen  
to operate video files. After you touch the key,  
the top category menu appears to let you se-  
lect the item for playback.  
Narrowing down listed songs  
1
Touch your desired category tab to dis-  
play the song or track list.  
!
!
!
!
!
Playlists (playlists)  
Genres (genres)  
Artists (artists)  
Albums (albums)  
Podcasts (podcasts)  
p This touch panel key is available only  
when there are both audio and video file  
in your iPod.  
The search screen is displayed.  
6 Display the top category menu  
Touching the key displays the top category be-  
fore you use the category tabs. If you select  
116  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using an iPod (iPod)  
17  
Search control  
2
Touching or switches the selection  
1
Touch your desired category tab to dis-  
to the next or previous page in the list.  
play the list.  
3
Touch the item that you want to refine.  
2
3
Touch the item that you want to refine.  
Refine the item until the track title is displayed  
on the list.  
Touch [c] or [d] to select the character.  
p THEor Theand space at the beginning  
of the artist name will be ignored and the  
next character will be taken into account  
for searching.  
p Touching [All] on the list includes all op-  
tions in the current list. For example, if you  
touch [All] after touching [Artists], you can  
proceed to the next screen with all artists in  
the list selected.  
p After you select Artists, Albums, or  
Genres, go on to touch one of the list to  
start playing the first songs in the selected  
list and display the next options.  
4
Touch the character key to display the  
page which includes applicable options.  
5
On the song (or episode) list, touch the  
track you want to play.  
4
On the song (or episode) list, touch the  
track you want to play.  
p After you select the track using this func-  
tion, touching [Menu] displays the list pre-  
viously selected.  
Starting the video playback  
This navigation system can play video if an  
iPod with video capabilities is connected.  
Searching for applicable items  
alphabetically  
Using the search control displays the page  
which includes the first applicable option.  
p This function is available for the alphabeti-  
cal list only.  
1
2
Touch [Video].  
Touch one of the categories in that con-  
tains the video you want to play.  
Video playback will start.  
117  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
17  
Using an iPod (iPod)  
If you select the video from the list to play  
after touching Top Menu, touching the key  
displays the previous list. (If you touch Top  
Menu again but do not select a video, this key  
is disabled until you select a video with the list  
next time.)  
3
Touch your desired item on the list to  
narrow down them until the video list ap-  
pears.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
4
On the video list, touch the video you  
5 Skip back or forward to another song  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
video. Touching [o] once skips to the start  
of the current video. Touching again will skip  
to the previous video. When the video with  
chapters played, chapter can be skipped back  
and forward.  
want to play.  
5
Touch the screen to display the touch  
panel keys.  
= For more details of the operation, refer to  
Fast reverse or forward  
Touch and hold [o] or [p] to fast rewind  
or fast forward.  
p Moving MULTI-CONTROL left or right  
enables you to perform the equivalent  
operations.  
Using the touch panel keys  
(Video)  
1
2
6 Playback and Pause  
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
3
7 Display the map screen  
4
5
8 Display the top category menu for video  
Touching the key displays the top category for  
video playback.  
6
7
9 Hide the touch panel keys  
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys.  
Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display  
the touch panel keys again.  
8
9
1 Recall equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer  
Browsing for a video  
Touching the item on list allows you to search  
for a video and play it in your iPod.  
2 Display the Functionmenu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
3 Switch the operation screen  
Touching this key switches between the  
screen to operate music files and the screen  
to operate video files. After you touch the key,  
the top category menu appears to let you se-  
lect the item for playback.  
p This touch panel key is available only  
when there are both audio and video file  
in your iPod.  
4 Display the previous selected list  
118  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using an iPod (iPod)  
17  
3
4
Touch [c] or [d] to select the character.  
p THEor Theand space at the beginning  
of the artist name will be ignored and the  
next character will be taken into account  
for searching.  
Narrowing down a video with the list  
1
Touch the category you want.  
Touch the character key to display the  
page which includes applicable options.  
5
On the video list, touch the video you  
want to play.  
2
Touching or switches the selection  
Using the Functionmenu  
to the next or previous page in the list.  
1
Touch [iPod] on the AV Sourcemenu  
to display the control screen for iPod.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
3
Touch the item that you want to refine.  
Refine the item until the track title is displayed  
on the list.  
2
Touch [Func].  
4
On the video list, touch the video you  
want to play.  
p After you select the video using this func-  
tion, touching [Menu] displays the list pre-  
viously selected.  
Searching for applicable items  
alphabetically  
Using the search control displays the page  
which includes the first applicable option.  
p This function is available for the alphabeti-  
cal list only.  
1
2
3
4
1 Setting repeat play  
There are two repeat play types for play-  
back.  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
!
!
One Repeats just the current track  
All Repeats all tracks in the selected  
list  
2 Setting the shuffle play for music  
This function shuffles songs or albums and  
plays them in random order.  
Search control  
Each touch of [Shuffle] changes the setting  
as follows:  
1
2
Touch the category you want.  
!
!
Off Does not shuffle.  
Songs Plays back songs in random  
order within the selected list  
Touch the item that you want to refine.  
119  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
17  
Using an iPod (iPod)  
!
Albums Selects an album randomly,  
and then plays back all songs in that  
album in order  
3 Setting the audiobook play speed  
While listening to an audiobook on iPod,  
playback speed can be changed.  
Each touch of [Audio Book] changes the  
setting as follows:  
!
!
Normal Playback in normal speed  
Slower Playback slower than normal  
speed  
!
Faster Playback faster than normal  
speed  
4 Playback video in wide screen mode  
If the video is compatible with wide screen  
format, set [Widescreen] to [On] in order to  
view the video image in the wide screen.  
Each touch of [Widescreen] changes the  
setting as follows:  
!
On Outputs the wide-screen video  
from iPod  
!
Off Outputs the normal-sized video  
from iPod  
p Display size is changed after you  
change Widescreensetting and select  
the video to play.  
p This setting is available only during the  
video operation.  
120  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Using the radio (FM)  
18  
You can listen to the radio by using the naviga-  
tion system. This section describes operations  
for radio (FM).  
Using the touch panel keys  
1
2
%
Touch [FM] on the AV Sourcemenu to  
display the FMscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
3
4
5
6
Reading the screen  
1
2
3
4
1 Recall equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer  
2 Display the Functionmenu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
3 Select a preset channel  
5
6
[c] or [d] can be used to switch preset chan-  
nels.  
4 Perform manual tuning  
7
To tune manually, touch [c] or [d] briefly. The  
frequencies move up or down one step at a  
time.  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Band indicator  
Shows which band the radio is tuned to: FM1  
to FM3.  
3 Preset number indicator  
Shows what preset item has been selected.  
4 Frequency indicator  
5 LOCAL indicator  
Shows when local seek tuning is on.  
6 STEREO indicator  
Shows that the frequency selected is being  
broadcast in stereo.  
7 Signal level indicator  
Perform seek tuning  
To perform seek tuning, touch and hold [c] or  
[d] for about one second and release. The  
tuner will scan the frequencies until a broad-  
cast strong enough for good reception is  
found.  
p You can cancel seek tuning by touching  
either [c] or [d] briefly.  
p If you touch and hold [c] or [d], you  
can skip broadcasting frequencies.  
Seek tuning will start as soon as you re-  
lease the keys.  
p Moving MULTI-CONTROL left or right  
enables you to perform the equivalent  
operations.  
5 Select an FM band  
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired FM  
band is displayed, FM1, FM2 or FM3.  
p This function is convenient for preparing  
different preset lists for each band.  
6 Display the map screen  
121  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
18  
Using the radio (FM)  
p Up to 18 FM stations, 6 for each of the three  
FM bands, as well as 6 AM stations can be  
stored in memory.  
Switching between the  
detailed information display  
and the preset list display  
You can switch the left side of the basic screen  
according to your preference.  
2
The next time you touch the same pre-  
set tuning key [P1] to [P6], the radio station  
frequencies are recalled from memory.  
p You can also use [c] and [d] to recall radio  
stations assigned to preset tuning keys [P1]  
to [P6].  
Using the Functionmenu  
1
Touch [FM] on the AV Sourcemenu to  
display the FMscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
%
Touch [Preset] (or [Detail]).  
Each touch of [Preset] (or [Detail]) changes  
the detailed information display or preset list  
display.  
2
Touch [Func].  
1
2
Storing and recalling broadcast  
frequencies  
With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys  
([P1] to [P6]), you can easily store up to six  
broadcast frequencies for later recall (also  
with the touch of a key).  
1 Storing the strongest broadcast fre-  
quencies  
= For details, refer to this page.  
2 Tuning in strong signals  
= For details, refer to the next page.  
Storing the strongest broadcast  
frequencies  
Preset tuning keys  
BSM(best stations memory) lets you auto-  
matically store the six strongest broadcast fre-  
quencies under the preset tuning keys [P1] to  
[P6] and, once stored there, you can tune in to  
these frequencies with the touch of a key.  
1
When you find a frequency that you  
want to store in memory, touch and hold a  
preset tuning key [P1] to [P6] until the pre-  
set number (e.g., P.ch 1) stops flashing.  
The selected radio station has been stored in  
memory.  
1
Touch [BSM].  
122  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the radio (FM)  
18  
2
Touch [Start] to start BSM.  
BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing,  
the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be  
stored under the preset tuning keys [P1] to  
[P6] in order of their signal strength. When  
this is complete, BSM stops flashing.  
p To cancel the storage process, touch  
[Stop].  
p Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM  
may replace broadcast frequencies you  
have already saved by using [P1] to [P6].  
Tuning in strong signals  
Local seek tuning allows you to tune in only  
those radio stations with sufficiently strong  
signals for good reception.  
1
Touch [Local].  
2
Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.  
To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].  
3
Touch [cPrev] or [Nextd] to set the sen-  
sitivity.  
There are four levels of sensitivity for FM.  
Level: 1 2 3 4  
p The level 4setting allows reception of only  
the strongest stations, while lower settings  
let you receive weaker stations.  
123  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
19  
HD RadioäReception  
a Detailed information  
You can listen to the radio by using the naviga-  
tion system. This section describes operations  
for HD Radio reception.  
= For details, refer to Switching the display  
p For details concerning operation, refer to  
the HD Radio tuners operation manual.  
Using the touch panel keys  
%
Touch [Digital Radio] on the AV  
Sourcemenu to display the Digital  
Radioscreen.  
1
2
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
3
4
Reading the screen  
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
1 Recall equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer  
2 Display the Functionmenu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
3 Select a preset channel  
6
7
8
9
a
[c] or [d] can be used to switch presets chan-  
nels.  
1 Source icon  
4 Perform manual tuning  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Band indicator  
To tune manually, touch [c] or [d] briefly. The  
frequencies move up or down one step at a  
time.  
Shows which band the radio is tuned to: FM1,  
FM2, FM3 or AM.  
Perform seek tuning  
3 Preset number indicator  
Shows what preset item has been selected.  
4 Frequency indicator  
To perform seek tuning, touch and hold [c] or  
[d] for about one second and release. The  
tuner will scan the frequencies until a broad-  
cast strong enough for good reception is  
found.  
5 Multicasting indicator  
Shows the number of multicast channels in  
the current frequency.  
p You can cancel seek tuning by touching  
either [c] or [d] briefly.  
p If you touch and hold [c] or [d], you  
can skip broadcasting frequencies.  
Seek tuning will start as soon as you re-  
lease the keys.  
6 Signal level indicator  
7 Blending mode indicator  
= For details, refer to Switching the re-  
8 Signal type indicator  
Shows the type of signal currently being re-  
ceived. If a digital broadcasting is received,  
Dappears. Otherwise, Aappears.  
9 Seek type indicator  
5 Select a band  
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired  
band is displayed: FM1, FM2, FM3 or AM.  
p This function is convenient for preparing  
different preset lists for each band.  
6 Display the map screen  
= For details, refer to Switching the seek  
124  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
HD RadioäReception  
19  
2
The next time you touch the same pre-  
Switching between the  
detailed information display  
and the preset list display  
You can switch the left side of the basic screen  
according to your preference.  
set tuning key [P1] to [P6], the radio station  
frequencies are recalled from memory.  
p You can also use [c] and [d] to recall radio  
stations assigned to preset tuning keys [P1]  
to [P6].  
Switching the display  
Desired information can be displayed.  
%
Touch [Disp].  
Touch [Disp] repeatedly to switch between the  
following settings:  
Call sign or frequency Artist name Song  
title Program type  
%
Touch [List] (or [Detail]).  
p Only when the tuner has been tuned in to  
an HD Radio broadcasting, display can be  
changed.  
p When the tuner has been tuned in to an HD  
Radio broadcasting, default display is chan-  
ged into station name instead of  
frequency.  
Each touch of [List] (or [Detail]) changes the  
detailed information display or preset list dis-  
play.  
Storing and recalling broadcast  
frequencies  
With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys  
([P1] to [P6]), you can easily store up to six  
broadcast frequencies for later recall (also  
with the touch of a key).  
Using the Functionmenu  
1
Touch [Digital Radio] on the AV  
Sourcemenu to display the Digital  
Radioscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
2
Touch [Func].  
Preset tuning keys  
1
When you find a frequency that you  
want to store in memory, touch and hold a  
preset tuning key [P1] to [P6] until the pre-  
set number (e.g., P.ch 1) stops flashing.  
The selected radio station has been stored in  
memory.  
1
2
3
4
1 Storing the strongest broadcast fre-  
quencies  
= For details, refer to the next page.  
125  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
19  
HD RadioäReception  
2 Switching the seek mode  
= For details, refer to this page.  
3 Tuning in strong signals  
= For details, refer to this page.  
4 Switching the reception mode  
= For details, refer to this page.  
Tuning in strong signals  
Local seek tuning allows you to tune in only  
those radio stations with sufficiently strong  
signals for good reception.  
1
Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.  
To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].  
2
Touch [cPrev] or [Nextd] to set the sen-  
Storing the strongest broadcast  
frequencies  
BSM(best stations memory) lets you auto-  
matically store the six strongest broadcast fre-  
quencies under the preset tuning keys [P1] to  
[P6] and, once stored there, you can tune in to  
these frequencies with the touch of a key.  
sitivity.  
There are four levels of sensitivity for FM and  
two levels for AM:  
FM: 1 2 3 4  
AM: 1 2  
p The FM 4(AM 2) setting allows recep-  
tion of only the strongest stations, while  
lower settings let you receive weaker sta-  
tions.  
%
Touch [Start] to turn BSM on.  
BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing,  
the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be  
stored under the preset tuning keys [P1] to  
[P6] in order of their signal strength. When  
this is complete, BSM stops flashing.  
p To cancel the storage process, touch  
[Stop].  
p Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM  
may replace broadcast frequencies you  
have already saved by using [P1] to [P6].  
Switching the reception mode  
If a digital broadcast reception condition gets  
poor, the tuner automatically switches to the  
analog broadcast of the same frequency level  
in default. If you want to prevent a frequent  
automatic switching, switch this setting to  
[Analog].  
%
Touch [Blending] to switch the recep-  
tion mode.  
Switching the seek mode  
You can select the method of seek tuning.  
!
!
[Analog]:  
Receives analog broadcasting only.  
[Digital-Analog auto]:  
%
Touch [Seek] to select the desired set-  
Automatically switches to the analog broad-  
cast of the same frequency level as the digi-  
tal broadcast.  
ting.  
!
[All]:  
Seeks stations from both analog and digital  
broadcasting.  
[HD]:  
p If you select Analogon this setting while  
[Seek] is set to HD, the setting on [Seek]  
turns to Allautomatically.  
!
Seeks from digital broadcasting only.  
p If you select HDon this setting while  
[Blending] is set to Analog, the setting  
on [Blending] turns to Digital-Analog  
autoautomatically.  
126  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the radio (AM)  
20  
You can listen to the radio using this naviga-  
tion system. This section describes operations  
for radio (AM).  
= For details, refer to Using the  
3 Select a preset channel  
c or d can be used to switch presets.  
4 Perform manual tuning  
%
Touch [AM] on the AV Sourcemenu  
to display the AMscreen.  
To tune manually, touch [c] or [d] briefly. The  
frequencies move up or down one step at a  
time.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Perform seek tuning  
To perform seek tuning, touch and hold [c] or  
[d] for about one second and release. The  
tuner will scan the frequencies until a broad-  
cast strong enough for good reception is  
found.  
Reading the screen  
1
2
3
p You can cancel seek tuning by touching  
either [c] or [d] briefly.  
p If you touch and hold [c] or [d], you  
can skip broadcasting frequencies.  
Seek tuning will start as soon as you re-  
lease the keys.  
4
5
p Moving MULTI-CONTROL left or right  
enables you to perform the equivalent  
operations.  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Preset number indicator  
Shows what preset item has been selected.  
3 Frequency indicator  
4 Signal level indicator  
5 LOCAL indicator  
5 Display the map screen  
Switching between the  
detailed information display  
and the preset list display  
You can switch the left side of the basic screen  
according to your preference.  
Shows when local seek tuning is on.  
Using the touch panel keys  
1
2
3
4
5
%
Touch [Preset] (or [Detail]).  
Each touch of [Preset] (or [Detail]) changes  
the detailed information display or preset list  
display.  
1 Recall equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer  
2 Display the Functionmenu  
127  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
20  
Using the radio (AM)  
2
Touch [Func].  
Storing and recalling broadcast  
frequencies  
With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys  
([P1] to [P6]), you can easily store up to six  
broadcast frequencies for later recall (also  
with the touch of a key).  
1
2
1 Storing the strongest broadcast fre-  
quencies  
= For details, refer to this page.  
2 Tuning in strong signals  
= For details, refer to this page.  
Preset tuning keys  
1
When you find a frequency that you  
Storing the strongest broadcast  
frequencies  
BSM(best stations memory) lets you auto-  
matically store the six strongest broadcast fre-  
quencies under the preset tuning keys [P1] to  
[P6] and, once stored there, you can tune in to  
these frequencies with the touch of a key.  
want to store in memory, touch and hold a  
preset tuning key [P1] to [P6] until the pre-  
set number (e.g., P.ch 1) stops flashing.  
The selected radio station has been stored in  
memory.  
2
The next time you touch the same pre-  
set tuning key [P1] to [P6], the radio station  
frequencies are recalled from memory.  
p You can also use [c] and [d] to recall radio  
stations assigned to preset tuning keys [P1]  
to [P6].  
%
Touch [Start] to turn BSM on.  
BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing,  
the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be  
stored under the preset tuning keys [P1] to  
[P6] in order of their signal strength. When  
this is complete, BSM stops flashing.  
p To cancel the storage process, touch  
[Stop].  
Using the Functionmenu  
p Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM  
may replace broadcast frequencies you  
have already saved by using [P1] to [P6].  
1
Touch [AM] on the AV Sourcemenu  
to display the AMscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Tuning in strong signals  
Local seek tuning allows you to tune in only  
those radio stations with sufficiently strong  
signals for good reception.  
1
Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.  
To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].  
128  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the radio (AM)  
20  
2
Touch [cPrev] or [Nextd] to set the sen-  
sitivity.  
There are two levels of sensitivity for AM.  
Level: 1 2  
p The level 2setting allows reception of only  
the strongest stations, while lower settings  
let you receive weaker stations.  
129  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
21  
Using the XM tuner  
You can use the navigation system to control  
an XM satellite digital tuner, which is sold se-  
parately.  
For details concerning operation, refer to the  
XM tuners operation manuals. This section  
provides information on XM operations with  
the navigation system which differs from that  
described in the XM tuners operation man-  
ual.  
About the logo for channel name  
Only the logo data that is contained in the na-  
vigation system can be displayed for each  
channel. The logo of a newly established chan-  
nel that is not contained cannot be displayed.  
When no logo may be displayed, the following  
substitute icon is displayed.  
Substitute icon  
The following XM satellite digital tuner units  
cannot be connected:  
GEX-P900XM, GEX-P910XM  
p The icon of each broadcast station is con-  
tained in the NAND flash memory based  
on the data provided by XM Satellite Radio  
as of December 2008.  
p Any changes made by XM Satellite Radio  
in the lineup or icon of the broadcast sta-  
tion in the future may not be supported by  
the navigation system, and may cause the  
unit to display incorrect icons.  
Reading the screen  
ALL CH MODE  
1
2
3
4
5
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 XM band indicator  
6
7
Shows the XM band that has been selected.  
3 Preset number indicator  
Shows what preset item has been selected.  
4 XM channel number indicator  
Shows the XM channel number the tuner is  
currently tuned to.  
8
9
CATEGORY MODE  
5 XM channel category  
5
Shows the category of broadcast channel.  
6 XM channel select mode indicator  
Shows what channel select mode has been  
selected. You can select a channel from all  
channels in ALL CH MODE, and select a  
channel from selected category in  
CATEGORY MODE.  
7 XM station name logo  
p The message ON THE AIRdisappears  
if the navigation system cannot receive  
XM tuner reception for some reason.  
8 XM station name indicator  
Shows the XM broadcast station name the  
tuner is currently tuned in.  
9 Detail information  
130  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the XM tuner  
21  
Shows the detailed information of the broad-  
cast channel currently being received.  
The channels move up or down one at a  
time.  
p If you keep touching [c] or [d] you can  
skip the broadcasting channels.  
6 Select an XM band  
Using the touch panel keys  
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired  
XM band is displayed: XM 1, XM 2 or  
XM 3. This is useful for switching the preset  
item.  
%
Touch [XM] on the AV Sourcemenu  
to display the XMscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
7 Display the map screen  
8 Preset key for receiving the traffic  
audio service  
ALL CH MODE  
1
2
3
= For details, refer to Using the direct traffic  
9 Switching the XM channel select mode  
You can switch the mode between the two  
methods for selecting and listing the chan-  
nel.  
4
5
ALL CH MODE:  
6
7
You can select a channel from all channels  
when you operate this function.  
CATEGORY MODE:  
89 a  
1
b
You can select a channel within a selected  
category that you operate this function.  
a Selecting an XM channel directly  
= For details, refer to Selecting an XM chan-  
CATEGORY MODE  
2
3
c
5
b Switching to the list display  
You can select the desired channel from the  
list display.  
= For details, refer to Selecting a channel  
c Switching the channel category  
Touch [c] or [d] to select the desired cate-  
gory.  
6
7
89 a  
b
1 Memorize the current song  
= For details, refer to Memorizing the song  
2 Recall equalizer curves  
Selecting an XM channel directly  
You can select an XM channel directly by en-  
tering the desired channel number.  
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer  
3 Display the Functionmenu  
= For details, refer to Using the Function”  
4 Recalling channels from the preset  
Touch to recall the preset channel.  
5 Perform manual tuning  
1
Touch [Direct].  
2
Touch [0] to [9] to input the desired  
channel number.  
To cancel the input numbers, touch [Clear].  
131  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
21  
Using the XM tuner  
3
While the input number is displayed,  
Selecting a channel from the list  
touch [Enter].  
The XM channel that was entered is selected.  
The list content can be switched so you can  
search for the track you want to listen to not  
only by the channel name but also by the artist  
name or song title.  
p The channel list shows all channels during  
ALL CH MODE, and the channels included  
in the selected category during  
4
Touch  
.
You return to the previous display.  
Displaying the Radio ID  
If you select CH: 000, the Radio ID is dis-  
played.  
CATEGORY MODE. To switch the channel  
mode, touch [Mode].  
1
Touch [List].  
1
Touch [Direct].  
XM channel list appears in the display.  
Each touch of [List] changes the screen as fol-  
lows:  
Detail information display or Preset list  
display CH name list (Channel name) —  
Song title list (Song title) Artist name list  
(Artist name)  
2
Input [000] and then touch [Enter].  
If you select another channel, display of the  
Radio ID is canceled.  
Storing and recalling broadcast  
stations  
With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys  
([P1] to [P6]), you can easily store up to six  
broadcast channels for later recall (also with  
the touch of a key).  
2
Touch the desired channel that you  
want to listen to.  
1
Select the channel that you want to  
store in memory.  
2
3
Touch [Preset] to display the preset list.  
Keep touching a preset tuning key [P1]  
to [P6].  
The selected station has been stored in mem-  
ory.  
The next time you touch the same preset tun-  
ing key [P1] to [P6] the station is recalled from  
memory.  
p Up to 18 stations, 6 for each of three XM  
bands can be stored in memory.  
p You can also touch [c] or [d] to recall sta-  
tions assigned to preset tuning keys [P1] to  
[P6] in the detailed information display dur-  
ing the ALL CH MODE.  
Touch or to switch to the next page or pre-  
vious page.  
p During CATEGORY MODE, touch [c] or  
[d] to switch to another category.  
p When the list switching operation is started  
from the detailed information display, the  
preset list appears in the end of the list se-  
lection.  
132  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the XM tuner  
21  
Using My Mixfunction  
My Mixfunction memorizes the song title  
and artist name of the song currently being re-  
ceived. When the song that matches the mem-  
orized song title and artist name is being  
broadcast on a station other than the one you  
are listening to, you will be alerted, and you  
can switch the station to listen to that song.  
p A track itself is NOT downloaded. ONLY the  
song title and the artist name are memor-  
ized.  
p Notification may not be provided depend-  
ing on the status of the Navigation System.  
p If there is even a slight difference between  
the memorized title and the title of the  
song being broadcast, no notification will  
be provided even though they are the same  
song.  
Using the direct traffic  
announcement function  
You can listen to the memorized Instant Traf-  
fic & Weatherchannel by directly calling it up  
with [TRAFFIC]. (Only one station can be  
memorized.)  
Memorizing the song  
The song title and artist name of the song you  
are listening to can be memorized to My Mix.  
%
Touch and hold [Memo].  
The song title and artist name of current song  
you are listening to are memorized, and a con-  
firmation message appears.  
Memorizing an Instant Traffic &  
Weatherchannel  
p The song title and artist name of up to 12  
songs can be memorized. Trying to save  
more than 12 songs will result in older ones  
being overwritten.  
1
Tune into Instant Traffic & Weather”  
channel.  
2
Touch and hold [TRAFFIC] for two sec-  
onds or more.  
That Instant Traffic & Weatherchannel will  
be memorized.  
p You cannot memorize the song title or the  
artist name when “– – – – – – – –” is dis-  
played on the title information.  
p Even if you use the SiriusConnect universal  
tuner together, only one station can be  
memorized. The station memorized after-  
ward will overwrite the existing one.  
p This function is invalid for the channel  
000.  
p The memorized title may not be displayed  
correctly depending on the conditions.  
p You can customize the setting for the mem-  
orized songs later.  
Tuning in to the memorized channel  
= For more details concerning the opera-  
%
Touch [TRAFFIC].  
p You can also perform this operation by  
touching [TRAFFIC] on the AV Source”  
menu.  
p You can even call up a Instant Traffic &  
Weatherchannel from a source other than  
the XM source.  
When the memorized song is broadcast  
A beep sounds, and a message is displayed.  
Touch [Yes] to switch to that station and listen  
to that track.  
p If the memorized song is not checked or  
when [Off] is selected on [Alert] on  
MEMO Editscreen, no alert will be pro-  
vided.  
p To cancel the announcement, touch [TRFC  
Off] on the screen.  
133  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
21  
Using the XM tuner  
Deleting the memorized songs  
You can delete each one of the memorized  
songs from the song title list.  
Using the Functionmenu  
1
Touch [XM] on the AV Sourcemenu  
to display the XMscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
1
Touch [Memo].  
2
Touch and hold the song you want to  
2
Touch [Func].  
delete.  
p To delete all songs that are memorized,  
touch [Delete All].  
3
Touch [Yes].  
1
1 Setting the memorized songs  
Setting the memorized songs  
Selecting the songs to alert  
The list of song titles memorized for the MyMix  
Function (MyMix list) is displayed. You can  
change the notification setting when the song  
is broadcast again. You can enable or disable  
notification for each song.  
1
Touch [Memo].  
2
Touch the song title that you want to  
exclude from the notification list.  
The check mark is removed, and the song title  
is excluded from the notification list.  
Changing the alert setting  
You can enable or disable alerts for all items at  
the same time. This function is useful when  
you want to turn alerts off temporarily without  
changing each memorized song.  
1
Touch [Memo].  
2
Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off].  
Touch to toggle the selection.  
134  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the SIRIUS tuner  
22  
Shows what preset item has been selected.  
4 SIRIUS channel number indicator  
Shows the SIRIUS channel number that the  
tuner is tuned to.  
5 SIRIUS channel select mode indicator  
Shows what channel select mode has been  
selected. You can select a channel from all  
channels in All Ch Mode, and select a chan-  
nel from the selected category in  
You can use the navigation system to control a  
Pioneer Sirius satellite digital tuner, which is  
sold separately.  
For details concerning operation, refer to the  
SIRIUS tuners operation manuals. This sec-  
tion provides information on SIRIUS opera-  
tions with navigation system which differs  
from that described in the SIRIUS tuners op-  
eration manual.  
Category Mode.  
p When you use the SiriusConnect universal  
tuner (sold separately) with this navigation  
system, Pioneer SIRIUS BUS INTERFACE is  
required. For details concerning operation,  
refer to the owners manual of Pioneer SIR-  
IUS BUS INTERFACE and SiriusConnect  
universal tuner.  
= For details, refer to Switch the SIRIUS  
6 SIRIUS station name logo  
p The message ON THE AIRdisappears  
if the navigation system cannot receive  
SIRIUS tuner reception for some reason.  
7 Variable information area  
Shows various information about the broad-  
cast channel currently being received.  
= For more details about the displayed in-  
formation, refer to Switch the SIRIUS  
Reading the screen  
All Ch Mode  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Using the touch panel keys  
%
Touch [SIRIUS] on the AV Source”  
menu to display the SIRIUSscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
7
All Ch Mode  
Category Mode  
1 2  
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Source icon  
9a b  
c
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 SIRIUS band indicator  
Shows the SIRIUS band that has been se-  
lected.  
3 Preset number indicator  
135  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
22  
Using the SIRIUS tuner  
a Switch the SIRIUS channel select  
mode  
Category Mode  
1 2  
3
4
You can switch the mode between the two  
methods for selecting and listing the chan-  
nel.  
d
6
All Ch Mode:  
You can select a channel from all channels  
when you operate this function.  
Category Mode:  
7
8
You can select a channel within a selected  
category that you operate this function.  
b Select a SIRIUS channel directly  
= For details, refer to Selecting a SIRIUS  
c Switch the SIRIUS display  
Each touch of [Disp] changes the display  
information.  
Channel number Channel name —  
Channel category Artist name/feature —  
Song/program title Composer  
d Switch the channel category  
Touch [c] or [d] to select the desired cate-  
gory.  
9a b  
c
1 Memorize the current song  
= For details, refer to Memorizing the song  
2 Switch the SIRIUS Instant replay mode  
= For details, refer to Using the Instant  
3 Recall equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer  
4 Display the Functionmenu  
= For details, refer to Using the Function”  
5 Recalling channels from the preset  
Touch to recall the preset channel.  
Storing broadcast stations  
You can register the channel currently  
being broadcast to the preset list.  
6 Perform manual tuning  
Selecting a SIRIUS channel directly  
You can select a SIRIUS channel directly by  
entering the desired channel number.  
1
Touch [Direct].  
2
Touch [0] to [9] to input the desired  
The channels move up or down one at a  
time.  
channel number.  
To cancel the input numbers, touch [Clear].  
p If you keep touching [c] or [d] you can  
skip the broadcasting channels.  
7 Select a SIRIUS band  
3
While the input number is displayed,  
touch [Enter].  
The SIRIUS channel that was entered se-  
lected.  
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired  
SIRIUS band is displayed, SIRIUS 1,  
SIRIUS 2, or SIRIUS 3. This is useful for  
switching the preset.  
4
Touch  
.
8 Display the map screen  
9 Preset key for receiving the traffic  
audio service  
You return to the previous display.  
= For details, refer to Using the direct traffic  
Display the Radio ID  
If you select CH: 000, the Radio ID is dis-  
played.  
136  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the SIRIUS tuner  
22  
1
2
Touch [Direct].  
Memorizing the song  
The song title and artist name of the song you  
are listening to can be memorized.  
Input [000] and then touch [Enter].  
If you select another channel, display of the  
Radio ID is canceled.  
%
Touch [Memo].  
The song title and artist name of the song you  
are listening to are memorized, and a confir-  
mation message appears.  
Storing and recalling broadcast  
stations  
p Up to 10 song titles and artist names can be  
With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys  
[P1] to [P6], you can easily store up to six  
broadcast stations for later recall (also with  
the touch of a key).  
memorized.  
p You cannot memorize the song title or the  
artist name when “– – – – – – – –” is dis-  
played on the title information.  
p You cannot memorize the song title or the  
artist name of channel 000.  
p The memorized title may not be displayed  
correctly.  
1
Select the channel that you want to  
store in memory.  
2
3
Touch [Preset] to display the preset list.  
Keep touching a preset tuning key [P1]  
When the memorized song is broadcast  
to [P6].  
A beep sounds, and a message is displayed.  
Touch [Yes] to switch to that station and listen  
to that track.  
p If the alert for the song is Offor [Alert  
Off] is selected, no notification will be pro-  
vided even when that song is broadcast.  
= For details, refer to Setting the memor-  
The selected station has been stored in mem-  
ory.  
The next time you touch the same preset tun-  
ing key [P1] to [P6] the station is recalled from  
memory.  
p Up to 18 stations, 6 for each of three SIRIUS  
bands can be stored in memory.  
p You can also touch [c] or [d] to recall sta-  
tions assigned to preset tuning keys [P1] to  
[P6] in the detailed information display dur-  
ing All Ch Mode.  
p Notification may not be provided depend-  
ing on the situation of the Navigation Sys-  
tem.  
= For details, refer to Selecting the songs  
p If there is even a slight difference between  
the memorized title and the title of the  
track being broadcast, no notification will  
be provided even though they are the same  
song.  
Using My Mixfunction  
The MyMix function memorizes the song title  
and artist name of the song currently being re-  
ceived. When a track that matches the memor-  
ized song title and artist name is being  
broadcast on a station other than the one you  
are listening to, you will be alerted, and you  
can switch the station to listen to that song.  
p The track itself is NOT downloaded; only  
the song title and the artist name are mem-  
orized.  
Using the direct traffic  
announcement function  
You can listen to a memorized traffic channel  
by directly calling it up with the [TRAFFIC]  
(Only one station can be memorized).  
137  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
22  
Using the SIRIUS tuner  
Memorizing an traffic channel  
[p] and hold  
Fast-forwards.  
1
Tune in to a traffic channel.  
Touching [f] switches between  
playback and pause.  
[f]  
2
Touch and hold [TRAFFIC] for two sec-  
onds or more.  
p During Instant Replaymode, each touch  
of [Disp] changes the display information  
as follows;  
The traffic channel will be memorized.  
p Even if you use this with the XM satellite  
radio tuner, only one station can be memor-  
ized. The station memorized afterward will  
overwrite the existing one.  
Time position Channel number Chan-  
nel name Channel category Artist  
name/feature Song/program title —  
Composer  
p The channels 000 can not be memorized.  
p You cannot replay the broadcast prior to the  
beginning of stored data.  
Tuning in to the memorized channel  
%
Touch [TRAFFIC].  
p You can also perform this operation by  
touching [TRAFFIC] on the AV Source”  
menu.  
Using the Functionmenu  
1
Touch [SIRIUS] on the AV Source”  
p To cancel a traffic announcement, touch  
[TRFC Off].  
menu to display the SIRIUSscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Using the Instant Replayfunction  
2
Touch [Func].  
The Instant Replayfunction allows you to  
replay the stored broadcast on the SIRIUS  
tuner (if the tuner capable for this function).  
As soon as you tune to a channel, the SIRIUS  
tuner automatically begins storing the broad-  
cast. It can store approximately up to 44 min-  
utes previous (depending on the selected  
channel and the memory capacity of con-  
nected tuner).  
1
2
3
1
Touch [Instant Replay] on the SIRIUS  
screen to activate the Instant Replay”  
mode.  
1 Setting the memorized songs  
= For details, refer to the next page.  
2 Using the Game Alert function  
= For details, refer to the next page.  
3 Displaying Game Information  
= For details, refer to page 140.  
2
Touch keys for Instant Replay.  
Return to the start of the current  
song or program. Touching again  
will skip back to the previous song  
or program.  
[o]  
[o] and hold  
Fast reverses.  
Forwards play to the next song or  
program  
[p]  
138  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the SIRIUS tuner  
22  
3
Touch [Delete] when the song you  
Setting the memorized songs  
Selecting the songs to alert  
Display the song title list memorized for the  
MyMix Function (MyMix list). You can change  
the setting of the notification when the song is  
broadcast again. You can enable or disable no-  
tification for each song.  
want to delete is displayed.  
A message will appear asking you to confirm  
the deletion.  
4
Touch [Yes].  
Using the Game Alert function  
Selecting teams for Game Alert  
1
Touch [Memo].  
This navigation system can alert you when  
games involving your favorite sports teams are  
about to start. To use this function you need to  
store the teams you want to follow in advance.  
2
Touch [c Prev] or [Next d] to select the  
desired song.  
3
Touch [On/Off] to turn the setting on.  
When the alert for the song is activated, [ON]  
appears at the beginning of the selected title.  
p Touch [On/Off] again to turn the setting off.  
1
2
Touch [Game Alert].  
Touch [c Prev] or [Next d] to select the  
league.  
Changing the alert setting  
3
Touch [c Prev] or [Next d] to select the  
You can enable or disable alerts for all items at  
the same time. This function is useful when  
you want to turn alerts off temporarily without  
changing each memorized song.  
team.  
4
Touch [On/Off].  
The team displayed as [ON] is the alert target.  
p When the selected team is excluded from  
the alert target, the team is displayed as  
[OFF]. Up to 12 teams can be selected.  
When you have already made 12 team se-  
lections, FULLis displayed and additional  
team selection is not possible. In this case,  
first delete the team selection and then try  
again.  
1
2
Touch [Memo].  
Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off].  
p Touch to toggle the selection.  
Deleting the memorized songs  
You can delete each one of the memorized  
tracks from the song title list.  
1
Touch [Memo].  
2
Touch [c Prev] or [Next d] to select the  
song title that you want to delete.  
139  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
22  
Using the SIRIUS tuner  
5
Touch [Alert On].  
2
Touch [Prev] or [Next] to view the game  
score information which is registered.  
p The game score will be updated automati-  
cally.  
p Touch [Tune To] to switch to the channel  
that broadcasts the displayed game.  
p If you have not made any team selections,  
Not Setis displayed.  
p When no games involving your favorite  
teams are currently being played  
NO GAMEis displayed.  
Changing the alert setting  
You can enable or disable the alert for selected  
items. This function is useful when to want to  
turn the alert off temporarily without changing  
the setting of each selected team.  
1
2
Touch [Game Alert].  
Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off].  
p Touch to toggle the selection.  
When a game involving one of your  
teams is broadcast  
A message is displayed. Touch [Jump] to  
switch the station, and you can view the game  
information. If you touch [Stay], the channel  
does not switch.  
p Alerts may not be provided depending on  
the status of the navigation system.  
Displaying Game Information  
An alert will be displayed when a game with  
the team you selected is about to start (or is  
currently under way). You can also display  
game information and changes to the broad-  
cast channel.  
p The Game Information function is available  
when [Alert] is [On] in Game Alert.  
1
Touch [Game Info].  
140  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using AV input  
23  
You can display video imageoutput by AV1  
Input or AV2 Input to the screen of the navi-  
gation system. For details of the connection  
method, refer to Installation Manual.  
Using the touch panel keys  
%
Touch the screen to display the touch  
panel keys.  
1
CAUTION  
For safety reasons, video images cannot be  
viewed while your vehicle is in motion. To view  
video images, you must stop in a safe place and  
apply the parking brake.  
Using AV1  
You can display video imageoutput by the  
2
3
equipment connected to AV1 Input.  
1 Recall equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer  
1
Touch [AV1 Input] on the AV System  
Settingsmenu.  
2 Hide the touch panel keys  
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel  
keys. Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to  
display the touch panel keys again.  
3 Display the map screen  
= For details, refer to Setting video input 1  
2
Touch [AV1] on the AV Sourcemenu.  
The image is displayed on the screen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Using AV2  
You can display video imageoutput by the  
equipment connected to AV2 Input.  
1
Touch [AV2 Input] on the AV System  
Settingsmenu.  
= For details, refer to Setting video input 2  
2
Touch [AV2] on the AV Sourcemenu.  
The image is displayed on the screen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
141  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
24  
Using the external unit (EXT1, EXT2)  
The term external unitrefers to future  
Using the touch panel keys  
Pioneer devices that are not currently planned  
for, or to devices that allow control of basic  
functions although they are not fully con-  
trolled by the navigation system. Two external  
units can be controlled by this navigation sys-  
tem. When two external units are connected,  
the navigation system allocates them as exter-  
nal unit 1 or external unit 2.  
%
Touch [EXT1] or [EXT2] on the AV  
Sourcemenu to select the external unit.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
1
2
For details of the connection method, refer to  
Installation Manual.  
3
For details concerning operation, refer to the  
external units operation manual. This section  
provides information on external unit opera-  
tions with the navigation system that differ  
from those described in the external units op-  
eration manual.  
4
5
6
7
p Operation varies depending on the external  
unit connected. (In some cases, the exter-  
nal unit may not respond.)  
1 Send a band command  
Touch to send a band command to the ex-  
ternal unit.  
p Operation varies depending on the exter-  
nal unit connected. (In some cases, the  
external unit may not respond.)  
Reading the screen  
2 Recall equalizer curves  
1
2
3
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer  
3 Send an [a], [b], [c], or [d] command  
Touch to operate the external unit.  
p Operation varies depending on the exter-  
nal unit connected. (In some cases,  
some functions may not be used until  
you touch and hold the key.)  
4 Switching between automatic and man-  
ual function  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 External unit indicator  
You can turn automatic and manual func-  
tion on or off.  
You can switch between Auto and Manual  
functions of the external unit connected.  
Initially, this function is set to Auto.  
p Operating commands set for Auto and  
Manual operations vary depending on  
the external unit connected.  
Displays the information that is sent by con-  
nected external units.  
3 Auto/Manual mode indicator  
Shows the current mode.  
5 Display the map screen  
6 Send a 1 key to 6 key command  
142  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the external unit (EXT1, EXT2)  
24  
The external unit can be operated by trans-  
mitting the operating commands set to 1  
key 6 key.  
p Operation varies depending on the exter-  
nal unit connected. (In some cases,  
some functions may not be used until  
you touch and hold the key.)  
7 Use F1 F4 to operate the external unit  
The external unit can be operated by trans-  
mitting the operating commands set to F1  
F4.  
p The operating commands set to F1 —  
F4 vary depending on the external unit.  
p Some functions may not be used until  
you touch and hold the key.  
143  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
25  
Customizing preferences  
4
Use the tool assigned to the desired op-  
The options in the Navi  
Settingsmenu  
tion to change the settings.  
1
Basic operations in the Navi  
Settingsmenu  
Preferences related to the navigation functions  
can be set.  
A method for changing the volume setting for  
the navigation guidance and beep is described  
here, along with an operational example.  
1
Press the MENU button to display the  
Top Menu, and then touch [Settings].  
2
3
2
Touch [Navi Settings].  
1 Slider  
Change the value by touching the desired  
point on the bar or dragging the slider to  
the desired point.  
2 Detailed setup key  
Displays the screen for setting the prefer-  
ences in detail.  
3 On-off control  
Touching [On] or [Off] enables activation or  
deactivation of this function.  
5
Touch  
to return to the Navi Set-  
The Navi Settingsmenu appears.  
Touch [Sound settings].  
tingsmenu.  
3
GPS & Time Settings  
Indicates the connection status of the GPS an-  
tenna, its reception sensitivity, and from how  
many satellites the signal is being received  
from.  
%
Touch [GPS & Time Settings] on the  
Navi Settingsmenu.  
The GPS Statusscreen appears.  
The Sound settingsmenu appears.  
144  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
25  
1
2
3
Time Settings  
Use the Time Settingsscreen to set the  
time manually.  
1
Touch [GPS & Time Settings] on the  
Navi Settingsmenu.  
The GPS Statusscreen appears.  
2
Touch [Time Settings].  
The Time Settingsscreen appears.  
4
5
1 Positions of the GPS constellation being re-  
ceived by the navigation system  
Signal com-  
munication  
Used in posi-  
tioning  
Color  
Green  
Gray  
Red  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
No  
Available options;  
!
Auto Correction”  
2 Shows the current comprehensive accu-  
racy, altitude and speed.  
3 Shows each satellites signal strength.  
4 Shows the connection status or reception  
condition of GPS antenna.  
Synchronizes the internal clock of this navi-  
gation system with the accurate time trans-  
mitted from GPS (GMT). Changing this  
preference allows you to set the time manu-  
ally.  
Color  
Condition  
3D reception (Normal positional  
accuracy)  
CAUTION  
Turning Auto Correctionto Offdis-  
Green  
ables the automatic change to the appropri-  
ate time zone. Note that the proper route  
may not be calculated if the time you set  
does not match the time zone of the area  
that your route passes through.  
2D reception (lower positional ac-  
curacy)  
Yellow  
Red  
Connected and no reception  
No connection  
Black  
with x  
[On]:  
Corrects the current time by changing the  
time zone automatically according to this  
systems whereabouts.  
5 Shows the GPS reception status. A blinking  
green lamp indicates whether positioning is  
works normally. If the lamp lights up in an-  
other color, there is a problem related with  
GPS reception. In such case, check whether  
the connection and installation are correct.  
[Off]:  
Corrects the current time according to the  
settings on Time Zoneand Time.  
Time Zone”  
!
Enables you to set the time zone manually.  
Touch the key to show the list and then  
touch the current time zone.  
145  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
25  
Customizing preferences  
!
Time”  
[High], [Medium], [Low]:  
Enables you to adjust the time difference by  
one hour. Touch a or b to adjust it.  
p Time Zoneand Timeare activated  
only when [Off] is selected.  
Draws the terrain (e.g. mountain chains) on  
the map with the selected detail level.  
[Off]:  
Does not draw the terrain on the map.  
POI Settings  
Map Settings  
The general settings related with a map screen  
can be customized.  
1
Touch [Map Visual] on the Navi Set-  
tingsmenu.  
The Map Visual Settingsscreen appears.  
1
Touch [Map Visual] on the Navi Set-  
tingsmenu.  
2
Touch [POI Settings].  
The Map Visual Settingsscreen appears.  
The POI Settingsscreen appears.  
= For more details of the operation, refer to  
2
Touch [Map Settings].  
The Map Settingsscreen appears.  
3D Settings  
The 3D map screen settings can be custo-  
mized.  
1
Touch [Map Visual] on the Navi Set-  
tingsmenu.  
The Map Visual Settingsscreen appears.  
2
Touch [3D Settings].  
The 3D Visual Settingsscreen appears.  
Available options;  
!
[Map color]  
Enables you to define the map color for day-  
time and nighttime use. Touch this key to  
show the next screen.  
Daylight color profile:”  
The daytime map color can be set. Touch  
the key and select the desired profile from  
the list.  
Night color profile:”  
The nighttime map color can be set. Touch  
the key and select the desired profile from  
the list.  
Night mode”  
Changes the settings for the nighttime  
map.  
Available options;  
!
Landmarks”  
You can select whether to draws or refrain  
from drawing graphical 3D landmarks on  
the map.  
!
!
Elevated Roads”  
[Automatic]:  
You can select whether to draws or refrain  
from drawing elevated roads, interchanges,  
and bridges on the map.  
Switches the map color defined under  
Map colorautomatically between day-  
time and nighttime.  
!
Terrain Detail Level”  
146  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
25  
[Night]:  
2
Touch [Displayed Info].  
Always displays the map in the color de-  
fined on Night color profile:.  
[Day]:  
Always displays the map in the color de-  
fined on Daylight color profile:.  
The Displayed Infoscreen appears.  
3
Touch the key on the right of Top  
field:to display the options.  
!
Elevation on 2D Map”  
You can select whether to draws or refrain  
from drawing the terrain with a realistic  
landscape on the map, such as a green  
space, water place, undulating surface.  
Show Street Labels”  
Shows or hides street names and city  
names.  
Full Screen Map”  
!
!
4
Touch your desired option.  
Shows/hides the Multi-Info windowand  
Second maneuver arrow.  
Displayed Info  
Allows you to select what options you want to  
display on each part of the Multi-Info win-  
dow.  
p The estimated time of arrival is an ideal  
value that the navigation system computes  
internally as the route is calculated. The es-  
timated time of arrival should be read just  
as a reference value, and does not guaran-  
tee arrival at the time indicated.  
A method for changing the value of Top field:  
is described here along with an operational ex-  
ample.  
Smart Zoom  
Enables the navigation system to zoom in  
automatically when you approach a guidance  
point and zoom out after you pass through it.  
You can setup the behavior while Smart  
Zoomis activated.  
p When no route is set, the navigation system  
will simply zoom in or out depending on  
your speed.  
1
Touch [Map Visual] on the Navi Set-  
tingsmenu.  
The Map Visual Settingsscreen appears.  
2
Touch [On] or [Off] to activate or deacti-  
vate Smart Zoom.  
1
Touch [Map Visual] on the Navi Set-  
Touching  
allows you to enter the detailed  
tingsmenu.  
The Map Visual Settingsscreen appears.  
setting screen only when [On] has been se-  
lected.  
147  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
25  
Customizing preferences  
Available options;  
Available options;  
!
!
!
Zoom-in limit:”  
Allows you to set the limit for zoom-in beha-  
vior.  
Zoom-out limit:”  
Allows you to set the limit for zoom-out be-  
havior.  
!
Route event distance for Overview  
mode:”  
Allows you to set a distance to activate  
Overview Mode. The map starts zoom-  
ing out when the distance to the next gui-  
dance point is further than the distance set  
here.  
Restore Smart Zoom”  
Allows you to set whether Smart Zoomis  
to be reactivated after changing the map  
scale, tilt, or rotation.  
!
Overview zoom level:”  
Allows you to set the map scale for zoom-  
out behavior in Overview Mode.  
Also, enables you to set how soon Smart  
Zoominterval will be reactivated after  
completion of the operations described pre-  
viously.  
Manage Track Logs  
= For more details of the operation, refer to  
!
Zoom In After Find”  
Shows the Map Confirmation Screenwith  
the preset map scale after you have  
searched for a position using one of the  
methods on the Destination Menu.  
Route  
The settings related to route calculation can  
be customized.  
%
menu.  
Touch [Route] on the Navi Settings”  
Overview Mode  
Enables the navigation system to zoom out  
automatically up to the selected map scale  
when the next guidance point is distant.  
The Route Settingsscreen appears.  
1
Touch [Map Visual] on the Navi Set-  
tingsmenu.  
The Map Visual Settingsscreen appears.  
2
Touch [On] or [Off] to activate or deacti-  
vate Overview Mode.  
Touching  
allows you to enter the detailed  
setting screen only when [On] has been se-  
lected.  
Available options;  
!
Method:”  
148  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
25  
Determines which condition takes priority  
for route calculation.  
[Fast]:  
p Turning back on a divided highway is  
not considered a U-turn.  
! Permit Needed”  
Calculates a route with the shortest travel  
time to your destination as a priority.  
[Short]:  
Calculates a route with the shortest dis-  
tance to your destination as a priority.  
[Easy]:  
Calculates a route to your destination with  
the fewest turning points possible as a  
priority.  
[On]:  
Calculates the route without taking into ac-  
count roads and areas where permission is  
needed for entry.  
[Off]:  
Calculates the route taking into account the  
roads and areas where permission is  
needed for entry.  
!
Toll Roads”  
[Economical]:  
[On]:  
Calculates a route on the basis of least fuel  
consumption.  
Calculates a route which does not avoid toll  
roads and areas.  
!
!
U-turn penalty:”  
Allows you to limit the distance increase for  
U-turns.  
Unpaved Roads”  
[Off]:  
Calculates a route which avoids toll roads  
and areas as far as possible.  
[On]:  
Warnings  
Calculates a route which does not avoid un-  
The settings related to warnings can be custo-  
mized.  
paved roads.  
[Off]:  
Calculates a route which avoids unpaved  
roads as far as possible.  
Highways”  
[On]:  
%
Touch [Warnings] on the Navi Set-  
tingsmenu.  
The Warning settingsscreen appears.  
!
!
!
Calculates a route which does not avoid  
freeways.  
[Off]:  
Calculates a route which avoids freeways  
as far as possible.  
Ferries”  
[On]:  
Calculates a route which does not avoid fer-  
ries.  
[Off]:  
Calculates a route which avoids ferries as  
far as possible.  
U-turns”  
[On]:  
Available options;  
!
Warn When Speeding”  
Sets whether or not to enable the excessive  
speed warnings for when you exceed the  
speed limit.  
Calculates a route which does not avoid U-  
turns.  
[Off]:  
CAUTION  
Calculates a route which avoids U-turns as  
far as possible.  
149  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
25  
Customizing preferences  
The speed limit is based on the map data-  
base. The speed limit in the database may  
not match the actual speed limit of the cur-  
rent road. This is not a definite value. Be  
sure to drive according to the actual speed  
limit.  
Set Home  
= For more details of the operation, refer to  
Demo Mode  
!
Speeding Tolerance”  
Sets the tolerance for the speed limit  
with a percentage.  
This is a demonstration function for retail  
stores. After a route is set, touching this key  
starts the simulation of route guidance.  
1
Touch [Demo Mode] on the Navi Set-  
Regional Settings  
tingsmenu.  
The display format for the distance unit, lati-  
tude and longitude, and other settings related  
to time and date can be customized.  
2
The demonstration guidance will  
begin.  
p If you want to run the simulation at faster  
speed, touch [Fly over] on the Route In-  
formationscreen.  
%
Touch [Regional Settings] on the Navi  
Settingsmenu.  
= For more details of the operation, refer to  
The Regional Settingsscreen appears.  
Sound settings  
All settings here are effective only for the navi-  
gation guidance and beep.  
%
Touch [Sound settings] on the Navi  
Settingsmenu.  
The Sound settingsmenu appears.  
Available options;  
!
Distance Units”  
Controls the unit of distance and speed  
shown.  
!
Coordinate display format”  
Controls the format of latitude and longi-  
tude shown.  
!
!
Date format”  
Controls the date display format.  
Date delimiter”  
Controls the delimiter format used for date  
display.  
Time format”  
Available options;  
!
Master”  
!
Controls the master volume of both the na-  
vigation guidance and beep.  
Voice”  
Controls the time display format.  
!
Controls the volume of the navigation gui-  
dance.  
150  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
25  
!
Keys”  
2
Touch [Maps].  
[On]:  
Sounds a beep.  
[Off]:  
Does not sound a beep.  
Dynamic Volume”  
Touching [Maps] allows you to view the infor-  
mation regarding the map database in detail.  
After that, touching the desired item on the  
list allows you to view more detailed informa-  
tion about the selected map database.  
!
Increases and decreases the master vo-  
lume of the navigation guidance and beep  
automatically according to the current  
speed. This function is very helpful when  
you are driving at high speed and there is  
too much noise to hear the guidance in-  
structions and beep.  
POI display settings  
You can display or hide the POI (points of inter-  
est) icons on the map. To avoid the screen be-  
coming crowded with POI icons, all the icons  
have been made invisible as a default setting.  
You can set the conditions for each category  
here and also create new categories.  
p If the custom POI is found on an external  
storage device (USB, SD), the navigation  
system will show a POI list which includes  
them.  
Touching  
allows you to enter the de-  
tailed setting screen only when [On] has  
been selected.  
Minimum speed:”  
Enables the navigation system to automati-  
cally start turning the volume up as the cur-  
rent speed reaches the value set here.  
Maximum speed:”  
Enables the navigation system to automati-  
cally maximize the volume when the current  
speed reaches the value set here.  
1
Touch [Map Visual] on the Navi Set-  
tingsmenu.  
The Map Visual Settingsscreen appears.  
2
Touch [POI Settings].  
Important Notice regarding Volume of  
Navigation Voice Guidance when Playing  
Audio Files from USB or SD  
3
Touch the desired category that you  
want to display.  
If music files stored on an external storage device  
(USB, SD) are played when the system guides the  
route (i.e., a destination has been selected and  
the system is routing you to a destination), the vo-  
lume of the navigation guidance voice will be the  
same as the volume of the music files being  
played, even if a different volume level has been  
selected on Masteror Voiceor Dynamic Vo-  
lumein the Sound settingsmenu.  
If there are more detailed categories within the  
selected category, repeat this step as many  
times as necessary.  
If there arent anymore detailed categories, a  
blank list appears. In this case, you can only  
create the new category by touching [New  
Group].  
About  
Enables you to check the copyright and other  
information about the map database.  
1
Touch [About].  
Copyright information of the database is dis-  
played.  
4
Touch [Edit] on the right of the desired  
sub-category to set the appearance.  
151  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
25  
Customizing preferences  
5
Touch the desired key to customize it.  
system will show a POI list which includes  
them.  
1
Touch [Map Visual] on the Navi Set-  
tingsmenu.  
The Map Visual Settingsscreen appears.  
2
3
Touch [POI Settings].  
Touch the desired category.  
Available options;  
! POI Icon Visibility Distance”  
Touch this key to show options. Touch one  
of them to set the desired visibility.  
When Satelliteis selected, the POI icons  
will appear even though they are far away  
from your current position. When Closeis  
selected, only the nearest POI icons will ap-  
pear. Selecting Offhides the POI icons of  
this category.  
Same Visibility in Subgroups”  
[On]:  
Also applies this visibility to all sub-cate-  
gories belonging to this category.  
[Off]:  
If there are more detailed categories within the  
selected category, repeat this step as many  
times as necessary.  
If there arent any more detailed categories, a  
blank list appears. In this case, touching  
[New Group] allows you to create a new cate-  
gory.  
!
Does not apply this visibility to all sub-cate-  
gories belonging to this category.  
Icon:”  
Touch this key to show options. Touch one  
of them to set the desired icon.  
[Remove]:  
4
Touch [New Group] at the screen where  
you want to create a new category.  
!
!
5
Enter the category name and touch  
[Done] to complete the entry.  
Touch this key to delete the selected cate-  
gory.  
p [Remove] is available only for POI cate-  
gories that are created on this naviga-  
tion system.  
Creating new categories  
If your customized POI does not match any of  
the pre-installed categories, create a new cate-  
gory and edit your customized POI so that it  
can belong to this newly-created category.  
p If the custom POI is found on an external  
storage device (USB, SD), the navigation  
152  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
Editing your customized POI  
If you have already stored the customized POI,  
you can edit its POI properties.  
p If the custom POI is found on an external  
storage device (USB, SD), the navigation  
system will show a POI list which includes  
them.  
25  
Touch one of them to set the desired cate-  
gory.  
POI Name:”  
Touching the key displays the screen for en-  
tering a new POI name. Enter the name  
and then touch [Done] to complete the  
entry.  
!
!
!
Icon:”  
Touch this key to show options. Touch one  
of them to set the desired icon.  
[Remove]:  
1
Touch [Map Visual] on the Navi Set-  
tingsmenu.  
The Map Visual Settingsscreen appears.  
Touching the key allows you to delete the  
selected POI.  
p [Remove] is available only for POIs that are  
created on this navigation system.  
2
3
Touch [POI Settings].  
Touch the category you want to edit.  
p The POI address is not editable.  
Recording your travel history  
Activating the track logger enables you to re-  
cord your driving history (called track log”  
below). You can review the travel history later  
and replay the travel for your reference.  
Activating track logger temporarily  
One-time activation is useful if you want to  
create a log only for that trip.  
If there are more detailed categories within the  
selected category, repeat this step until the de-  
sired POI appears.  
1
Touch [Map Visual] on the Navi Set-  
4
Touch the POI you want.  
tingsmenu.  
The Edit POIscreen appears.  
The Map Visual Settingsscreen appears.  
5
Touch the desired key to customize it.  
2
Touch [Manage Track Logs].  
A list of track logs already recorded appears. A  
blank list appears if you have not recorded it  
yet.  
Available options;  
!
Group:”  
The category that the item currently se-  
lected belongs to can be changed. Touch-  
ing the key shows the options available.  
153  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
25  
Customizing preferences  
3
Touch [Record] to activate the track log-  
4
Touch the desired key to operate it.  
ger.  
Available options;  
The key then changes to [Stop Recording].  
Touching [Stop Recording] allows you to de-  
activate the track logger.  
Touching [Export all track logs] exports all  
track logs currently stored to the external sto-  
rage device (USB or SD) at once.  
In addition, if you export track logs to the exter-  
nal storage devices, you can check the track  
logs using [AVIC FEEDS].  
!
[Rename]:  
Touch this key to display the screen for en-  
tering a new name for the track log. Enter  
the name and then touch [Done] to com-  
plete the entry.  
!
[Export]:  
Touch this key to export the currently se-  
lected track log to the external storage de-  
vice (USB or SD).  
p If there is not enough space in the built-in  
memory, the oldest track log will be over-  
written by the new one.  
p If you want to permanently activate the  
track logger whenever the GPS signal is  
available, switch Enable Auto-savingto  
On.  
!
!
!
[Delete]:  
Touch this key to delete the track log.  
[Delete all]:  
Touching this key deletes all track logs.  
The key next to Color on the map::  
Touching this key displays the screen for  
changing the color used for the route high-  
lighting of the track log. Touch the desired  
color on the color list. The color of track  
logs is assigned automatically within prede-  
fined colors when this setting is estab-  
lished.  
= For details, refer to Setting track logger  
Browsing and replaying the track log  
1
Touch [Map Visual] on the Navi Set-  
tingsmenu.  
The Map Visual Settingsscreen appears.  
Setting track logger options  
Touch [Map Visual] on the Navi Set-  
tingsmenu.  
1
2
Touch [Manage Track Logs].  
A list of track logs already recorded appears.  
Touching enables you to replay the track  
log with Fly over.  
The Map Visual Settingsscreen appears.  
2
3
Touch [Manage Track Logs].  
Touch [Track Log Options].  
3
Touch the desired track log on the list.  
More details about the track log appears.  
154  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
25  
4
Touch the desired key to operate it.  
2
Touch the key next to Address:.  
Available options;  
3
Perform one of the search methods and  
!
Update interval:”  
locate the cursor on your desired position.  
Sets how often the system updates the log.  
Current autosave track size:”  
Sets a size limit on automatic logging. This  
setting will be effective only when Enable  
Auto-savingis On.  
!
!
Enable Auto-saving”  
Sets whether or not automatic logging is  
activated.  
!
!
Limit Track DB Size”  
Limits the total data size for logging.  
Maximum track database size:”  
Sets a size limit on logging. This parameter  
is only adjustable when Limit Track DB  
Sizeis On.  
4
5
6
Touch [OK].  
Touch the key next to Phone #.  
Enter your home phone number, then  
!
Create NMEA Log”  
touch [Done].  
Creates the log files in the SD memory  
card. When this setting is On, the system  
outputs the log files with NMEA-0183 for-  
mat onto the SD memory card.  
Options on the System  
Settingsmenu  
Displaying the System  
Settingsmenu  
Setting your home position  
Registering your home position saves time  
and effort. Also, routes to home positions can  
be calculated easily with a single touch of the  
key from the Destination Menu. The regis-  
tered home position can also be modified  
later.  
1
Press the MENU button to display the  
Top Menu, and then touch [Settings].  
2
Touch [System Settings].  
The System Settingsmenu appears.  
1
Touch [Set Home] on the Navi Set-  
tingsmenu.  
155  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
25  
Customizing preferences  
2
Touch the key next to Voice lan-  
guage:.  
The language list is displayed.  
3
Touch the desired language.  
After the language is selected, the screen re-  
turns to the previous screen.  
p [TTS Setup] is not used normally. This key  
will be used in the future when the system  
needs a replacement of current TTS files.  
4
Touch the key next to Program lan-  
guage:.  
Selecting the language  
You can set the languages used on the pro-  
gram and voice guidance. Each language can  
be set separately.  
p If you use voice operation, select [English]  
in [Program language:] of Language. If  
you select other languages, voice operation  
will not be available.  
5
Touch the desired language.  
If you change [Program language:], a mes-  
sage prompting you to reboot appears. Touch  
[OK] to reboot the system.  
Changing the splash screen  
You can change the splash screen that ap-  
pears when the navigation system starts. Copy  
your chosen image to the external storage de-  
vice (USB, SD), and select the image to im-  
port.  
= For details, refer to Basics of Voice Oper-  
1
Touch [Language] on the System Set-  
tingsmenu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the System  
p Splash screen images should be used with-  
in the following formats;  
BMP or JPEG files  
Allowable horizontal and vertical size  
are 2 592 pixels x 1 944 pixels or smaller  
Allowable data size is 15 MB or smaller  
p Proper compatibility with allowable files is  
not guaranteed.  
156  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
25  
p Imported original images will be stored in  
the built-in memory, but the ability to save  
these images cannot be guaranteed com-  
pletely. If your original image data is de-  
leted, insert the external storage device  
(USB, SD) again and re-import the original  
image.  
view camera image installed on your vehicle.  
When the shift lever is in the REVERSE (R) po-  
sition, the screen automatically switches to  
full-screen rear view camera.  
Camera for RearView”  
[RearView] can display the full-screen rear  
view camera image any time without relation  
to the shift lever position after touching [Rear-  
View] on the AV Sourcemenu. [RearView]  
is useful if you want to monitor an attached  
trailer, etc.  
1
Create a folder named Pictureson the  
top-most directory of the external storage  
device (USB, SD) and store the picture files  
in this folder.  
2
Insert the SD memory card into the SD  
CAUTION  
card slot or plug the USB storage device  
into the USB connector.  
Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which  
outputs mirror reversed images, otherwise the  
screen image may appear reversed.  
3
Touch [Splash Screen] on the System  
Settingsmenu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the System  
p Immediately verify whether the display  
changes to a rear view camera image when  
the shift lever is moved to REVERSE (R)  
from another position.  
p When the whole screen changes to a rear  
view camera image during normal driving,  
switch to another setting.  
The navigation system checks the external sto-  
rage device (USB, SD). If an appropriate file is  
found, the file list will be displayed.  
p If there is no Picturesfolder or loadable  
file, a message appears.  
p You can switch the list by touching [Import  
from SD] and [Import from USB].  
p Initially, this function is set to On.  
1
Touch [Back Camera] on the System  
4
Touch the image to use as the splash  
Settingsmenu.  
screen from the list.  
The image is displayed on the screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the System  
The Camera Inputscreen appears.  
5
Touch [OK].  
The image is set as the splash screen, and the  
system returns to the System Settings”  
menu.  
2
Touch [On] next to Camerato acti-  
vate the camera setting.  
p You can only switch to RearViewif this  
setting is [On].  
Setting the rear view camera  
3
Touch [Battery] or [GND] next to  
Polarityto select the appropriate polarity  
setting.  
The following two functions are available. The  
rear view camera feature requires a separately  
sold rear view camera (e.g. ND-BC2). (For de-  
tails, consult your dealer.)  
!
Battery When the polarity of the con-  
nected lead is positive while the shift lever  
is in the REVERSE (R) position  
Rear view camera  
The navigation system features a function that  
automatically switches to the full-screen rear  
!
GND When the polarity of the connected  
lead is negative while the shift lever is in  
the REVERSE (R) position  
157  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
25  
Customizing preferences  
5
Touch [OK].  
Adjusting the response  
positions of the touch panel  
(touch panel calibration)  
If you feel that the touch panel keys on the  
screen deviate from the actual positions that  
respond to your touch, adjust the response po-  
sitions of the touch panel screen.  
p Do not use a sharp pointed tool such as a  
ballpoint pen or a mechanical pen, which  
could damage the screen.  
1
Touch [Screen Calibration] on the Sys-  
Adjusting the screen brightness  
tem Settingsmenu.  
A message confirming whether to start the ca-  
libration appears.  
1
Touch [Picture Adjustment] on the Sys-  
tem Settingsmenu.  
p You can also start calibration by pressing  
and holding the MENU button on the Top  
Menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the System  
2
Touch [+] or [] to adjust the brightness.  
2
Touch [OK].  
Each time you touch [+] or [] increases or de-  
creases the level. 10 to 00 is displayed as the  
level is increased or decreased.  
3
Touch  
to return to the previous  
screen.  
p You can also start adjustment by pressing  
and holding the MAP button.  
Setting the illumination color  
The illumination color can be selected from 11  
different colors. Furthermore, the illumination  
color can switched between these 11 colors in  
order.  
3
Touch and hold the target that point to  
the center and corners of the LCD screen.  
The target indicates the order.  
4
Touch anywhere on the screen.  
The adjusted position data will be saved.  
p Do not turn off the engine while saving the  
adjusted position data.  
Selecting the color from the preset  
colors  
1
Touch [Illumi Color] on the System Set-  
tingsmenu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the System  
158  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
25  
2
Touch the color you want.  
Current color balance  
p An entry cannot be stored with all of the va-  
lues set to +00.  
Available options;  
4
Touch [Memory 1], [Memory 2] or  
!
Colored keys Selects the desired preset  
[Memory 3] to store the illumination color.  
color  
5
Touch to return to the previous  
!
Memory 1/Memory 2/Memory 3 Col-  
ors registered in the memory  
= For details, refer to Creating a user-de-  
screen.  
Checking the version information  
Touch [Service Information] on the  
!
Scan Shifts between the eight default  
colors in sequence gradually.  
1
System Settingsmenu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the System  
Creating a user-defined color and  
storing it to memory  
You can create a user-defined color and set it  
as the illumination color.  
2
Check the version information.  
Restore Factory Settings  
1
Touch [Illumi Color] on the System Set-  
Resets various settings registered to the navi-  
gation system and restores them to the default  
or factory settings.  
p Some data remains. Read Returning the na-  
tings before you operate this function.  
= For more detailed information about the  
items which would be erased, refer to  
tingsmenu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the System  
2
Touch [Custom].  
p If [Scan] is set, [Custom] cannot be se-  
lected.  
3
Touch [+] or [] to adjust the values for  
Red, Green and Blue to create a favorite  
color.  
Watch the illumination of hardware keys while  
adjusting the color.  
Each time you touch [+] or [] increases or de-  
creases the value of the selected item. +31 to  
+00 is displayed as the value is increased or  
decreased.  
159  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
25  
Customizing preferences  
1
Touch [Restore/Delete] on the System  
Settingsmenu.  
2
Touch [Restore Factory Settings] or [De-  
lete user information].  
p Because deleted data cannot be restored,  
take extra care not to mistakenly delete  
items.  
3
Touch [OK].  
The navigation system will now restart.  
p You cannot make adjustments when the AV  
source is OFF.  
p You cannot select [SLA] when the FM tuner  
is selected as the AV source.  
Turning off the screen  
By turning off the backlight of the LCD screen,  
you can turn off the screen display without  
turning off the voice guidance.  
%
Touch [Screen Off] on the System Set-  
Using balance adjustment  
You can select a fader/balance setting that  
provides an ideal listening environment in all  
occupied seats.  
tingsmenu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the System  
The screen is turned off.  
p Touch anywhere on the screen to turn it  
back on.  
1
Touch [FAD/BAL] on the AV Sound Set-  
tingsmenu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV  
When [Sub W] is selected in [Rear SP],  
[Balance] will be displayed instead of  
[FAD/BAL] and front/rear speaker balance  
cannot be adjusted.  
The AV Sound Settings”  
menu options  
Displaying the AV Sound  
Settingsmenu  
1
Press the MENU button to display the  
2
Touch [a] or [b] to adjust front/rear  
speaker balance.  
Top Menu, and then touch [Settings].  
Each time you touch [a] or [b], the front/rear  
speaker balance moves towards the front or  
the rear.  
2
Touch [AV Sound].  
The AV Sound Settingsmenu appears.  
160  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
25  
Front:15to Rear:15is displayed as the  
front/rear speaker balance moves from front to  
rear.  
Vocal  
Vocal is a curve in which the midrange, which is the  
human vocal range, is boosted.  
Setting Front:and Rear:to 0is correct  
when using a two speaker system.  
Flat  
Flat is a flat curve in which nothing is boosted.  
Custom1  
3
Touch [c] or [d] to adjust left/right  
Custom1 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-  
ate. A separate custom curve can be created for each  
source.  
speaker balance.  
Each time you touch [c] or [d], the left/right  
speaker balance moves towards the left or the  
right.  
Custom2  
Custom2 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-  
ate. If you select this curve, the effect is reflected all  
AV source.  
1
Touch [EQ] on the AV Sound Settings”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV  
2
Touch the equalizer you want.  
p You can also sequentially select the desired  
equalizer curve by touching [EQ] on the AV  
operation screen of each source.  
Left:15 to Right:15 is displayed as the left/  
right speaker balance moves from left to right.  
Using the equalizer  
The equalizer lets you adjust equalization to  
match vehicle interior acoustic characteristics  
as desired.  
Adjusting the equalizer curves  
You can adjust the currently selected equalizer  
curve setting as desired. Adjustments can be  
made with a 3-band parametric equalizer.  
The difference between Custom1and  
Custom2”  
Recalling equalizer curves  
There are seven stored equalizer curves that  
you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list  
of the equalizer curves:  
!
A separate Custom1 curve can be created  
for each source. If you make adjustments  
when a curve S.Bass, Powerful, Natural,  
Vocal, Flat, or Custom1 is selected, the  
equalizer curve settings will be memorized  
in Custom1.  
Equalizer curve  
S.Bass  
S.Bass is a curve in which only low-pitched sound is  
boosted.  
!
!
A Custom2 curve can be created common  
to all sources. If you make adjustments  
when Custom2 curve is selected, the Cus-  
tom2 curve will be updated.  
The adjusted Custom1 curve is memorized  
for each of the source selected, but one  
curve is shared for the following sources.  
CD, ROM, DVD-V, DVD-VR, DivX (for  
AVIC-X9115BT)  
Powerful  
Powerful is a curve in which low-pitched and high-  
pitched sounds are boosted.  
Natural  
Natural is a curve in which low-pitched and high-  
pitched sounds are slightly boosted.  
161  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
25  
Customizing preferences  
CD, ROM (for AVIC-X7115BT)  
XM and SIRIUS  
AV1 and AV2  
1
Touch [EQ] on the AV Sound Settings”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV  
EXT1 and EXT2  
!
!
The different source volume level can be  
set between iPod and USB.  
2
Touch the one of keys to select a curve  
that you want to use as the basis of custo-  
mizing.  
When [Flat] is selected, no supplement or  
correction is made to the sound. This is  
useful to check the effect of the equalizer  
curves by switching alternatively between  
[Flat] and a set equalizer curve.  
3
4
Touch [Customize].  
Touch [c] or [d] to select the equalizer  
band to adjust.  
Adjustable parameters  
Each time you touch [c] or [d] selects equali-  
zer bands in the following order:  
Low Mid High  
You can adjust the center frequency, level and  
Q factor (curve characteristics) of each cur-  
rently selected curve band (Low/Mid/High).  
5
Touch [c] or [d] to select the desired  
frequency.  
Touch [c] or [d] until the desired frequency  
appears in the display.  
Low: 40 Hz 80 Hz 100 Hz 160 Hz  
Mid: 200 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 2 kHz  
High: 3.15 kHz 8 kHz 10 kHz —  
12.5 kHz  
6
Touch [c] or [d] to adjust the level of  
the equalizer band.  
!
!
Band:  
Each time you touch [c] or [d], the level of  
the equalization band increases or decreases.  
+6 to 6 is displayed as the level is increased  
or decreased.  
You can select the equalizer band.  
Frequency:  
You can select which frequency to set as  
the center frequency.  
!
!
Level:  
7
Touch [c] or [d] to select the desired Q  
You can select the decibel (dB) level of the  
selected EQ.  
Q:  
You can select the details of the curve char-  
acteristics. (The following figure shows the  
characteristic image.)  
factor.  
Touch [c] or [d] until the desired Q factor ap-  
pears in the display.  
Wide2 Wide1 Narrow1 Narrow2  
Adjusting loudness  
Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the  
low- and high-sound ranges at low volume.  
1
Touch [Loudness] on the AV Sound  
Settingsmenu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV  
162  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
25  
2
Touch [Loudness] to select the level you  
Using the high pass filter  
want.  
When you do not want low sounds from the  
subwoofer output frequency range to play  
from the front or rear speakers, activate HPF  
(high pass filter). Only frequencies higher than  
those in the selected range are output from  
the front or rear speakers.  
Each time you touch [Loudness], the level is  
selected in the following order:  
Off Low Mid High  
Using subwoofer output  
The navigation system is equipped with a sub-  
woofer output mechanism, which can be  
turned on or off.  
p Only when Sub Wooferis [On], you can  
adjust Phase, Leveland Frequency.  
1
Touch [HPF] on the AV Sound Settings”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV  
2
Touch [HPF] to select cut-off frequency.  
1
Touch [Sub Woofer] on the AV Sound  
Each time you touch [HPF] selects cut-off fre-  
quencies in the following order:  
Off 50 Hz 63 Hz 80 Hz 100 Hz —  
125 Hz  
Settingsmenu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV  
2
Touch [On] to turn subwoofer output  
on.  
Adjusting source levels  
To turn subwoofer output off, touch [Off].  
SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust  
the volume level of each source to prevent ra-  
dical changes in volume when switching be-  
tween sources.  
p Settings are based on the FM tuner volume  
level, which remains unchanged.  
1
Compare the FM tuner volume level  
with the level of the source you wish to ad-  
just.  
2
Touch [SLA] on the AV Sound Settings”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV  
3
Touch [Reverse] or [Normal] to select  
the phase of subwoofer output.  
4
Touch [+] or [] next to Levelto adjust  
the output level.  
+6 to 24 is displayed as the level is increased  
or decreased.  
3
Touch [+] or [] to adjust the source vo-  
lume.  
+4 to 4 is displayed as the source volume is  
increased or decreased.  
5
Touch [+] or [] next to Frequencyto  
The following AV sources are set to the same  
source level adjustment volume automatically.  
select cut-off frequency.  
Each time you touch [+] or [], cut-off frequen-  
cies are selected in the following order:  
50 Hz 63 Hz 80 Hz 100 Hz 125 Hz  
Only frequencies lower than those in the se-  
lected range are output from the subwoofer.  
!
!
!
!
!
CD, ROM, DivX (for AVIC-X9115BT)  
CD, ROM (for AVIC-X7115BT)  
XM and SIRIUS  
AV1 and AV2  
EXT1 and EXT2  
163  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
25  
Customizing preferences  
p The different source volume level can be set  
between iPod and USB.  
p For AVIC-X9115BT, the source volume level  
can be set to DVD-V and DVD-VR respec-  
tively as well as differently from the other  
sources of the built-in DVD drive previously  
mentioned.  
Enhancing bass (Bass Booster)  
The Bass Boosterenhances bass sounds,  
which can be muted by driving noise.  
p You can only adjust [Wide Mode] when se-  
lecting an AV source with video.  
p Only when the AV source is OFF, the fol-  
lowing items can be adjusted;  
1
Touch [Bass Booster] on the AV Sound  
[MUTE Input/GUIDE] and [Rear SP]  
Settingsmenu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV  
Setting video input 1 (AV1)  
You can switch this setting according to the  
connected component.  
2
Touch [+] or [-] to adjust the range from  
0 to 6.  
p This setting applies to RCA inputs  
(AUDIO INPUT and VIDEO INPUT) on the  
back of the system.  
Options on the AV System  
Settingsmenu  
Displaying the AV System  
Settingsmenu  
%
Touch [AV1 Input] on the AV System  
Settingsmenu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV Sys-  
Each touch of [AV1 Input] changes the set-  
ting as follows:  
1
Press the MENU button to display the  
Top Menu, and then touch [Settings].  
!
iPod iPod connected with the USB Inter-  
face cable for iPod (CD-IU230V)  
Video External video component  
EXT Pioneer external unit connected  
with the RCA video cable  
2
Touch [AV Settings].  
The AV System Settingsmenu appears.  
!
!
!
Off No video component is connected  
Setting video input 2 (AV2)  
You can switch this setting according to the  
connected component.  
p This setting applies to mini-jack input on  
the front panel.  
%
Touch [AV2 Input] on the AV System  
Settingsmenu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV Sys-  
164  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
25  
Each touch of [AV2 Input] changes the set-  
ting as follows:  
A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal di-  
rection only, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 TV pic-  
ture (normal picture) without any omissions.  
Normal (normal)  
!
!
Off No video component is connected  
Video External video component  
p Use AV2 Input when connecting CD-RM10  
(sold separately) through the external video  
component.  
A 4:3 picture is displayed normally, giving you  
no sense of disparity since its proportions are  
the same as that of the normal picture.  
p Different settings can be stored for each  
video source.  
Switching the auto antenna  
setting  
p The same setting is automatically applied  
for the following grouping.  
!
!
!
SD, USB, iPod  
AV1 and AV2  
EXT1 and EXT2  
If the blue lead of the navigation system is  
connected to the antenna control terminal of  
the vehicle, select either of the following set-  
tings.  
p When video is viewed in a wide screen  
mode that does not match its original as-  
pect ratio, it may look strange.  
p Remember that use of this system for com-  
mercial or public viewing purposes may  
constitute an infringement on the authors  
rights protected by the Copyright Law.  
p The navigation map and the rear view cam-  
era picture is always viewed at Full.  
!
Radio The antenna extends or turns on  
only when the audio source is FM or AM.  
The antenna is stored or turned off when  
the AV source is switched to another  
source.  
!
Power The antenna extends or turns on  
when the ignition switch is turned on. The  
antenna is stored or turned off when the  
ignition switch is turned off.  
Switching the sound muting/  
attenuation  
You can select the muting method when the  
navigation guidance is output. This setting is  
also effective for a mute signal that has been  
received from the MUTE lead connected to the  
navigation system.  
p When you use a cellular phone connected  
with Bluetooth technology (dialing, talking,  
incoming call), the AV source volume is al-  
ways muted independently of this setting.  
p When the voice recognition mode is acti-  
vated, the AV source volume is always  
muted independently of this setting.  
%
Touch [Ant CTRL] on the AV System  
Settingsmenu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV Sys-  
Touching [Ant CTRL] switches between  
[Radio] and [Power].  
p Regardless of whether [Radio] or [Power]  
is selected, turning off the ignition switch  
will cause the antenna to automatically re-  
tract or turn off.  
Changing the wide screen mode  
%
Touch [Wide Mode] on the AV System  
Settingsmenu.  
%
Touch [MUTE Input/GUIDE] on the AV  
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV Sys-  
Each touch of [Wide Mode] changes the set-  
ting as follows:  
Full Normal  
Full (full)  
System Settingsmenu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV Sys-  
Each touch of [MUTE Input/GUIDE] changes  
the setting as follows:  
!
MUTE Muting  
165  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
25  
Customizing preferences  
!
!
ATT Attenuation  
Normal Volume does not change  
p Both rear speaker leads output and RCA  
rear output are switched simultaneously in  
this setting. (When you use the product  
without RCA rear output, this setting only  
applies to the rear speaker leads.)  
p Operation returns to normal when the cor-  
respond action is ended.  
p When SDor USBselected as the AV  
source, the sounds are not muted or attenu-  
ated even when the navigation guidance  
and beep outputs.  
p When SDor USBis selected as the AV  
source, the AV sounds, the navigation gui-  
dance and beep sounds are mixed and the  
volume can be adjusted simultaneously.  
Acquiring/Cataloging iPod  
music information  
If you always set the language other than Eng-  
lishon Program language:, this setting is  
unnecessary.  
Important Notice regarding Volume of  
Navigation Voice Guidance when Playing  
Audio Files from USB or SD  
Unless [VR Catalog Mode] is turned off, this  
navigation system tries to acquire the informa-  
tion needed to operate iPod with voice com-  
mands. It may take a short period of time to  
transfer the information. Change the setting  
according to your usage.  
The navigation system starts acquiring/catalo-  
ging music information (1) when the iPod is  
connected or when the system boots up while  
the iPod is connected and (2) when iPod is the  
selected and displayed AV Source, unless [VR  
Catalog Mode] is turned off.  
If music files stored on an external storage device  
(USB, SD) are played when the system guides the  
route (i.e., a destination has been selected and  
the system is routing you to a destination), the vo-  
lume of the navigation guidance voice will be the  
same as the volume of the music files being  
played, even if a different volume level has been  
selected on Masteror Voiceor Dynamic Vo-  
lumein the Sound settingsmenu.  
p If you do not use iPod, this setting is un-  
necessary.  
p During transfer, iPod operations (such as  
[Shuffle], [Menu], or [Video]) are not  
available.  
p Once the cataloging is completed, you can  
deactivate [VR Catalog Mode] until you  
update the content/data on iPod. If you up-  
date the iPod data, activate [VR Catalog  
Mode] again to transfer the music informa-  
tion and synchronize the music information  
for voice commands with the data on iPod.  
p After you select Offin [VR Catalog  
Mode], the system doesnt catalog the  
data on the iPod. In such case, the pre-  
viously cataloged data are available as  
voice commands.  
Setting the rear output  
The navigation systems rear output can be  
used for a full-range speaker or subwoofer  
connection. If you switch Rear SP to Sub W,  
you can connect a rear speaker lead directly to  
a subwoofer without using an auxiliary amp.  
Initially, the navigation system is set for a rear  
full-range speaker connection (Full).  
1
Touch [Rear SP] on the AV System Set-  
tingsmenu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV Sys-  
2
Touch [Rear SP] to switch the rear out-  
put setting.  
When no subwoofer is connected to the rear  
output, select Full.  
When a subwoofer is connected to the rear  
output, select Sub W.  
166  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
25  
p Once you start the cataloging process, only  
a few basic voice commands can be used  
for iPod until the process has completely  
finished.  
p If unreadable characters are included in  
the data on your iPod, names or types may  
not be available as voice commands.  
Important Notice regarding Voice  
Control for iPods  
Voice Control for iPods may be limited if cata-  
loging of iPod content is not completed. Cata-  
loging of iPod content only occurs when the  
system is in AV Sourcemode and the iPod”  
is the selected and displayed AV Source”  
screen. Cataloging of iPod content will not  
occur if the system is off, if any other AV  
Sourceis selected (aside from iPod), or if the  
system is in any other mode (aside from AV  
Sourcemode) such as Destination Menu,  
Contacts, Settings Menu, Phone Menu”  
or the map screen. If you wish to use Voice  
Control for all iPod content, it is recommended  
that you first connect your iPod, select iPod”  
as the AV source, and keep the iPod screen  
displayed until cataloging is completed cat-  
aloging of iPod content should only take a few  
minutes, and will depend on the size of the  
content stored on your iPod. A message will  
be displayed when cataloging is completed.  
1
Touch [VR Catalog Mode] on the AV  
System Settingsmenu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV Sys-  
2
Touch [On] or [Off] to activate or deacti-  
vate VR Catalog Mode.  
167  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
26  
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice  
To Ensure Safe Driving  
Some functions of the navigation system sup-  
ports voice operation.  
p The navigation function is not available  
using voice operation.  
Basics of Voice Operation  
Your Pioneer navigation system uses the latest  
in voice recognition technology. You can use  
voice commands to operate many of its func-  
tions. This chapter describes where you can  
use voice commands, and also what com-  
mands the system accepts.  
CAUTION  
For your safety, avoid viewing the screen in the  
voice operation as much as possible while  
driving.  
Flow of voice operation  
You can start voice operation any time even  
when the map screen is displayed or audio is  
operating. (Some operations are not available.)  
The basic steps of voice operations are as  
follows.  
If you use voice operation, select [English] in  
[Program language:] of Language. If you  
select other languages, voice operation will not  
be available.  
1
Switch the screen to map screen or AV  
operation screen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
2
Press MULTI-CONTROL to activate voice  
operations.  
3
Speak a command into the microphone  
after the beep.  
4
When the command is recognized, the  
navigation system displays next options on  
the screen, and pronounces it in some case-  
s.  
5
6
Repeat previous step as necessary.  
The requested operation will be carried  
out.  
p The voice operation may not be operable for a  
minute after the navigation system has booted  
up.  
168  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice  
26  
Starting voice operation  
Operating iPod by voice  
%
Press MULTI-CONTROL on map screen  
You can play music using voice operation from  
the iPod connected to the navigation system.  
p Playback of iPod movies is not available  
using voice commands.  
p To use the content/data on the iPod for  
voice operation, transfer the data to this  
system first.  
or the AV operation screen.  
The voice operation screen appears. The  
screen may vary depending on what screen is  
displayed at the time that you start voice oper-  
ation.  
= For details, refer to Acquiring/Cataloging  
Examples of voice operation of the iPod are  
shown below. (A method for playing the album  
title named Pioneeris described here, along  
with an operational example.)  
1
Press MULTI-CONTROL to start voice op-  
eration.  
2
Say Change Sourceto display the AV  
If you lose your way...  
You can listen to the brief operating instruc-  
source selection screen.  
tion by touching  
.
3
Say iPodon the selection screen to  
switch the AV source to iPod.  
p Touching the item on the screen also en-  
ables you to select the desired AV source.  
To cancel voice operation  
You can cancel the voice operation feature at  
any time by saying Cancel. After you cancel  
voice operations, the display returns to the  
screen displayed before the voice operation  
screen appeared.  
4
Press MULTI-CONTROL to start voice op-  
eration.  
5
Say Play the album Pioneerto play-  
p You can also cancel voice operation if you  
touch on the voice operation screen, or  
press MENU button or MAP button.  
back the album name Pioneer.  
If the command is recognized properly, play-  
back starts from the first song of Pioneer.  
Calling the entry on Contacts”  
A method for dialing the entry named Nancy”  
is described here along with an operational ex-  
ample.  
1
Press MULTI-CONTROL to start voice op-  
eration.  
2
Say Call Nancyto make a call.  
Dialing starts.  
169  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
26  
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice  
Available Basic Voice Commands  
The navigation system can also recognize the  
words in the following list.  
Basic commands  
Voice commands and operations  
Back d Returns the previous screen.  
Cancel d Cancels the voice operation.  
Help d Outputs the brief operating instruction by voice.  
Voice operation for the iPod  
For <Artist name>, <Album name>, <Play-  
list name>, <Genre name> shown on the fol-  
lowing chart, say the name their name in the  
iPod.  
p Playback of iPod movies is not available  
using voice commands.  
Voice commands and operations  
Shuffle play d Plays all songs randomly.  
Pause the music, Stop the music d Pauses the song currently playing .  
Resume the music d Resumes the song currently playing .  
Next song d Plays the next song.  
Previous song d Plays the previous song or return to the beginning of the song currently playing.  
Play songs d Start playback from the top of Songs.  
Play artists d Start playback from the top of Artists.  
Play the artist <Artist name> d Start playback from the top of the selected artist.  
Play albums d Start playback from the top of Albums.  
Play the album <Album name> d Start playback from the top of the selected album.  
Play playlists d Start playback from the top of Playlists.  
Play the playlist <Playlist name> d Start playback from the top of the selected playlist.  
Play genres d Start playback from the top of Genres.  
Play the genre <Genre name> d Start playback from the top of the selected genre.  
Show artists d Displays the artist list together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Touch the desired  
item on the list or say the desired voice commands.  
Show the artist <Artist name> d Displays the album list of the selected artist together with sub-screen to continue  
the voice operation. d Touch the desired item on the list or say the desired voice commands.  
Show albums d Displays the album list together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Touch the de-  
sired item on the list or say the desired voice commands.  
Show the album <Album name> d Displays the song list of the selected album together with sub-screen to con-  
tinue the voice operation. d Touch the desired item on the list or say the desired voice commands.  
170  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice  
26  
Show playlists d Displays the playlist together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Touch the de-  
sired item on the list or say the desired voice commands.  
Show the playlist <Playlist name> d Displays the song list of the selected playlist together with sub-screen to con-  
tinue the voice operation. d Touch the desired item on the list or say the desired voice commands.  
Show genre d Displays the genre list together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Touch the desired  
item on the list or say the desired voice commands.  
Show the genre <Genre name> d Displays the song list of the selected genre list together with sub-screen to con-  
tinue the voice operation. d Touch the desired item on the list or say the desired voice commands.  
Show songs d Displays the song list together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Touch the desired  
item on the list or say the desired voice commands.  
Page down, Page up d Displays the previous or next page of the selection list. (Note 1)  
(Note 1) The voice commands is available only when the selection list is displayed.  
Voice operation for AV source (other than iPod)  
AV source selection  
Voice commands and operations  
Change Source to DISC d Switch the AV source to DISC.  
Change Source to FM d Switch the AV source to FM.  
Change Source to AM d Switch the AV source to AM.  
Change Source to XM Satellite Radio d Switch the AV source to XM.  
Change Source to SIRIUS Satellite Radio d Switch the AV source to SIRIUS.  
Change Source to HD Radio d Switch the AV source to Digital Radio.  
Change Source to SD Media d Switch the AV source to SD.  
Change Source to USB d Switch the AV source to USB.  
Change Source to iPod d Switch the AV source to iPod.  
Change Source d Switch to the AV source selection screen. d Touch the desired AV source or say the desired AV  
source name.  
External storage device (USB, SD)  
Voice commands and operations  
Shuffle play d Plays all songs randomly.  
Pause the music, Stop the music d Pauses the song currently playing .  
Resume the music d Resumes the song currently playing .  
Next song d Plays the next song.  
Previous song d Plays the previous song or return to the beginning of the song currently playing.  
171  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
26  
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice  
Voice commands related to hands-free phoning  
p You can make a phone call by voice dialing  
if the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth  
wireless technology is being paired with  
the navigation system.  
p For <entrys name> shown on the follow-  
ing chart, say the name of the entry stored  
in Contacts.  
p For <phone number> shown on the follow-  
ing chart, say the desired phone number.  
Voice commands and operations  
Call <entrys name> d Make a call to the entry (Note 2).  
Call <entrys name> mobile d Dial the cellular phone number of the entry (Note 3).  
Call <entrys name> home d Dial the home phone number of the entry (Note 3).  
Call <entrys name> office d Dial the office phone number of the entry (Note 3).  
Call <phone number> d Dial the phone number.  
Make a call d Say the phone number you want to call d The system starts dialing to the number.  
Make a call d Say the name of entry stored on Contactsyou want to call d The system starts dialing to the num-  
ber (Note2).  
List outgoing calls d Display the list of recent outgoing calls (Dialed Numbers) to select the number and call.  
List recent calls d Incoming calls (Note 4) d Display the list of recently received calls (Received Calls) to select  
the number and call.  
List recent calls d Outgoing calls (Note 4) d Display the list of recent outgoing calls (Dialed Numbers) to select  
the number and call.  
List recent incoming calls d Display the list of recently received calls (Received Calls) to select the number and  
call.  
(Note 2) If the entry has multiple phone number data, selection list may appear. In such case, say the type of phone  
number or touch the one of listed item that you want to dial.  
(Note 3) If there is no corresponding type on the entry, the system may suggest you other phone numbers of the entry.  
In such case, say the type of phone number or touch the one of listed item that you want to dial.  
(Note 4) Touching the item on the screen also enables you to select the desired list.  
172  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice  
Tips for Voice Operation  
26  
For your voice commands to be correctly re-  
cognized and interpreted, ensure that condi-  
tions are suitable for recognition.  
Close the vehicle windows  
Please note that wind through the vehicle win-  
dow or miscellaneous noise from outside the  
vehicle can interfere with voice operation.  
Position the microphone carefully  
For optimum pick-up, the microphone should  
be fixed at a suitable distance directly in front  
of the driver.  
Pause before giving a command  
Speaking too soon may cause the recognition  
to fail.  
Pronounce your commands carefully  
Speak slowly, deliberately, and clearly.  
173  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
27  
Other functions  
Entering the password  
Setting the anti-theft function  
On the password input screen, you must enter  
the current password. If you enter an incorrect  
password three times, the screen is locked  
and operations using touch panel keys are dis-  
abled.  
You can set a password for the navigation sys-  
tem. If the back-up lead is cut or the RESET  
button is pressed after the password is set, the  
navigation system prompts for the password  
at the time of next boot up.  
1
Enter the password.  
Setting the password  
2
Touch [Done].  
1
With the map displayed, press the  
The message Antitheft is being unlocked.  
Do not switch off during the process.ap-  
pears if you entered the correct password and  
the navigation system is unlocking.  
MENU button.  
2
3
Touch [Settings] on the Top Menu.  
Touch Area1, followed by Area2, and  
then touch and hold Area3.  
Deleting the password  
The current password can be deleted.  
1
With the map displayed, press the  
MENU button.  
2
3
Touch [Settings] on the Top Menu.  
Touch Area1, followed by Area2, and  
then touch and hold Area3.  
Area1  
Area2  
Area3  
4
Touch [Clear password].  
The password setting screen appears.  
4
Touch [Set Password].  
The password setting screen appears.  
5
6
7
Enter the current password.  
Touch [Done].  
5
Enter the password you want to set.  
p 5 to 16 characters can be entered for a  
password.  
Touch [Yes].  
The message for deletion appears and then  
the current password is deleted.  
6
7
Touch [Done].  
Reenter the password to confirm the  
setting.  
Forgotten passwords  
Contact the nearest authorized Pioneer Ser-  
vice Station.  
8
Touch [Done].  
Password protection is applied.  
p If you want to change the password cur-  
rently set, enter the current password and  
then enter the new one.  
174  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Other functions  
27  
Returning the navigation  
system to the default or  
factory settings  
You can return settings or recorded content to  
the default or factory settings. There are three  
methods to clear user data, and the situations  
and the cleared content are different for each  
method. For information regarding the content  
that is cleared by each method, see the list  
presented later.  
Method 1: Press the RESET button  
Pressing the RESET button clears almost all  
settings of the audio function.  
This transforms the system into the same state  
as when the battery of the vehicle is removed  
or the yellow lead of the navigation system is  
disconnected.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Method 2: Restore Factory Settings  
This clears some items in the Navi Settings”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Restore Factory Set-  
Method 3: Delete user information  
Clears almost all settings and user data of the  
navigation function, the audio function and  
the phone function.  
= For details, refer to Restore Factory Set-  
175  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
27  
Other functions  
Setting items to be deleted  
The items to be deleted vary depending on the  
reset method. The items listed in the following  
table return to the default or factory settings.  
p Almost all items not listed below will be re-  
tained. However, some of the items to be re-  
turned to their default values are not listed  
if the setting value can be easily recovered  
by user, such as the last map scale, the last  
status of AV operation screen, etc.  
: The setting will be retained.  
1: The setting will be cleared and returned to  
the default or factory settings.  
Navigation functions  
Method 1 Method 2 Method 3  
All settings on MSN Direct(*)  
Historyon Address”  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Destination Menu  
[History]  
[Favorites]  
Saved Criteriaon POI”  
[Set Home]  
[GPS & Time Settings], [Map Visual], [Route],  
[Warnings], [Regional Settings]  
1
1
1
1
[Sound settings]  
Voice, Keys, Dynamic Volume (On/Off)”  
Navi Settings  
[Sound settings]  
Master, Dynamic Volume(Maximum speed:,  
Minimum speed:)”  
1
[Language]  
1
1
1
1
1
System Settings  
Other settings  
Pin icon data  
Others  
Anti-theft password  
(*) This function is available for AVIC-X9115BT.  
Audio functions  
Method 1 Method 2 Method 3  
[Wide Mode], [VR Catalog Mode]  
1
1
1
AV Settings  
Other settings  
All settings  
AV Sound  
CD, ROM, DivX, FM,  
AM  
All settings (*1)  
All settings  
1
1
DVD-V, DVD-VR  
176  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Other functions  
27  
SD, USB  
All settings (*1)  
1
1
1
Volume setting for AV sources  
(*1) All settings including the setting on the Functionmenu are deleted.  
Phone functions  
[Phone Volume]  
[Received Calls]  
Method 1 Method 2 Method 3  
1
1
1
1
1
1
Phone Menu (*2)  
[Dialed Numbers]  
[Missed Calls]  
[Phone Settings]  
All entries  
Contacts (*2)  
(*2) All stored data of 3 users is deleted.  
177  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Troubleshooting  
If you have problems operating your navigation system, refer to this section. The most common  
problems are listed below, along with likely causes and solutions. While this list is not comprehen-  
sive, it should answer your most common problems. If a solution to your problem cannot be  
found here, contact your dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer service facility.  
Problems with the navigation screen  
Symptom  
Cause  
Action (Reference)  
The power doesnt turn on. The Leads and connectors are incor-  
navigation system doesnt oper- rectly connected.  
Confirm once more that all connections are  
correct.  
ate.  
The fuse is blown.  
Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing, then  
replace the fuse. Be very sure to install a cor-  
rect fuse with the same rating.  
Noise and other factors are causing Press the RESET button. (Page 26)  
the built-in microprocessor to oper-  
ate incorrectly.  
You cannot position your vehicle The quality of signals from the GPS Check the GPS signal reception and the posi-  
on the map without a significant satellites is poor, causing reduced  
tion of the GPS antenna if necessary, or con-  
positioning error.  
positioning accuracy. Such a loss of tinue driving until reception improves. Keep  
signal quality may occur for the fol- the antenna clear.  
lowing reasons:  
The GPS antenna is in an unsuita-  
ble location.  
Obstacles are blocking signals  
from the satellites.  
The position of satellites relative  
to your vehicle is inadequate.  
Signals from the GPS satellites  
have been modified to reduce accu-  
racy. (GPS satellites are operated by  
the US Department of Defense, and  
the US government reserves the  
right to distort positioning data for  
military reasons. This may lead to  
greater positioning errors.)  
If a vehicle phone or cellular  
phone is used near the GPS anten-  
na, GPS reception may be lost tem-  
porarily.  
Something covers the GPS antenna. Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray  
paint or vehicle wax, because this may block  
the reception of GPS signals. Snow buildup  
can also degrade the signals.  
Signals from the vehicles speed  
Check that the cables are properly connected.  
pulse are not being picked up prop- If necessary, consult the dealer that installed  
erly. (This information is intended  
for AVIC-X9115BT only.)  
the system.  
178  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
The navigation system may not be  
mounted securely in your vehicle.  
Check that the navigation system is securely  
mounted and, if necessary, consult the dealer  
that installed the system.  
You cannot position your vehicle  
on the map without a significant  
positioning error.  
The navigation system is installed  
with an extreme angle exceeding  
the installation angle limitations.  
Confirm the installation angle. (The naviga-  
tion system must be installed within the al-  
lowed installation angle. For details, refer to  
Installation Manual.)  
Indication of the position of your ve- Check whether or not the reverse gear signal  
hicle is misaligned after a U-turn or input lead (violet) is connected properly. (The  
reversing.  
navigation system works properly without the  
lead connected, but positioning accuracy will  
be adversely affected.)  
The map color does not switch [Night mode] is set to [Day].  
Check [Night mode] setting and make sure  
automatically between daytime  
[Automatic] is selected. (Page 146)  
and nighttime.  
The orange/white lead is not con-  
Check the connection.  
nected.  
The screen is too bright.  
The display is very dim.  
An improper value has been set on Check the settings.  
Brightness.  
[Night] is selected in Night  
Check the setting of [Night mode] and select  
mode.  
[Automatic] or [Day]. (Page 146)  
An improper value has been set on Check the settings.  
Brightness.  
No sounds of AV source are pro- The volume level is low.  
Adjust the volume level.  
Turn the attenuator or mute off.  
Check the connection.  
duced.  
The attenuator or mute is on.  
The volume level will not rise.  
A speaker lead is disconnected.  
The volume of navigation gui-  
Try to adjust them with MULTI-CON- Turn the volume up or down using [Sound  
dance and beeps cannot be ad- TROL.  
settings] on the Navi Settingsmenu.  
justed.  
The person on the other end of The voice from the person on the  
Use the following methods to reduce the  
the phone call cannot hear the other end of the phone call is output echo:  
conversation due to an echo.  
from the speakers and then picked Lower the volume on the receiver  
up by the microphone again, creat- Have both parties pause slightly before  
ing an echo.  
speaking  
Theres no picture.  
The parking brake cord is not con-  
nected.  
Connect the parking brake cord, and apply  
the parking brake.  
The parking brake is not applied.  
Connect the parking brake cord, and apply  
the parking brake.  
The backlight of the LCD panel is  
turned off.  
Turn on the backlight. (Page 160)  
Rear displaypicture disap-  
The source disc being listened to in Before ejecting the disc, switch the source.  
pears. (This information is in-  
tended for AVIC-X9115BT only.) ejected.  
the navigation system has been  
This problem may occur when certain con-  
nection methods are used.  
There is a problem with the Rear  
Check the Rear displayand its connection.  
display, for example a faulty wiring  
connection.  
An AV source that cannot output to Select an appropriate AV source.  
the rear display is selected.  
179  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
The setting for the rear view camera Select the appropriate setting for the rear  
is incorrect.  
view camera.  
Nothing is displayed and the  
touch panel keys cannot be  
used.  
The shift lever was placed in [R]  
when the rear view camera was not MENU button to return to the Top Menu”  
Press the MAP button, and then press the  
connected.  
and then select the correct polarity setting for  
[Back Camera]. (Page 157)  
There is no response when the The touch panel keys deviate from  
touch panel key are touched, or the actual positions that respond to  
Perform touch panel calibration. (Page 158)  
a different key responds.  
your touch for some reason.  
The external storage device  
(USB, SD) cannot be used.  
The USB storage device has been  
removed immediately after plugging the engine. Turn the ignition key back to Acc  
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn off  
it.  
off. Then start the engine again, and turn the  
power to the navigation system back on.  
Problems in the AV screen  
Symptom  
Cause  
Action (Reference)  
CD or DVD playback is not pos- The disc is inserted upside down.  
Insert the disc with the label upward.  
Clean the disc.  
sible.  
The disc is dirty.  
The disc is cracked or otherwise da- Insert a normal, round disc.  
maged.  
The files on the disc are an irregular Check the file format.  
file format.  
The disc format cannot be played  
back.  
Replace the disc.  
The loaded disc is a type this system Check what type of disc it is. (For more cau-  
cannot play.  
tions about handling each type of media,  
refer to Page 194.)  
The screen is covered by a cau- The parking brake lead is not con-  
tion message and the video can- nected or applied.  
not be shown.  
Connect the parking brake lead correctly, and  
apply the parking brake.  
The parking brake interlock is acti- Park your vehicle in a safe place and apply  
vated.  
the parking brake.  
No video output from connected [AV1 Input] or [AV2 Input] setting Please read the following page and establish  
equipments.  
is incorrect.  
the setting correctly. (Page 141)  
No video output from connected  
iPod.  
The connection of the USB interface Connect both the USB plug and the RCA  
cable for iPod is incorrect.  
cable side. (If only one of these connection  
has been made, the iPod will not work prop-  
The audio or video skips.  
The navigation system is not firmly Secure the navigation system firmly.  
secured.  
No sounds are produced.  
Cables are not connected correctly. Connect the cables correctly.  
The volume level will not rise.  
The system is performing still, slow There is no sound during still, slow motion, or  
motion, or frame-by-frame playback frame-by-frame playback with DVD-Video.  
with DVD-Video.  
The system is paused or performing, For the media other than music CD (CD-DA),  
fast reverse or forward during the  
disc playback.  
there is no sound on fast reverse or forward.  
180  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
The operation is not compatible  
with the video configuration.  
This operation is not possible. (For example,  
the DVD playing does not feature that angle,  
audio system, subtitle language, etc.)  
The icon 9 is displayed, and op-  
eration is not possible.  
The picture stops (pauses) and The reading of data is impossible  
the navigation system cannot be during disc playback.  
operated.  
After touching g once, start playback once  
more.  
The picture is stretched, with in- The aspect setting is incorrect for  
Select the appropriate setting for that image.  
correct aspect ratio.  
the display.  
A parental lock message is dis- Parental lock is on.  
played and DVD playback is not  
possible.  
Turn parental lock off or change the level.  
Parental lock for DVD playback The code number is incorrect.  
cannot be canceled.  
Input the correct code number. (Page 104)  
Playback is not with the audio  
language and subtitle language dialog or subtitles in the language  
settings selected in [DVD  
The DVD playing does not feature  
Switching to a selected language is not possi-  
ble if the language selected in [DVD Setup]  
is not recorded on the disc.  
selected in [DVD Setup].  
Setup].  
The picture is extremely unclear/ The disc features a signal to prohibit Since the navigation system is compatible  
distorted and dark during play- copying. (Some discs may have  
with the copy guard analogue copy protect  
system, the picture may suffer from horizon-  
tal stripes or other imperfections when a disc  
with that kind of protection signal is viewed  
on some displays. This does not mean the na-  
vigation system is malfunctioning.  
back.  
this.)  
Cannot be operated.  
The iPod is frozen.  
! Reconnect the iPod with the USB interface  
cable for iPod.  
! Update the iPod software version.  
An error has occurred.  
! Reconnect the iPod with the USB interface  
cable for iPod.  
! Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn  
off the engine. Turn the ignition key back to  
Acc off. Then start the engine again, and  
turn the power to the navigation system back  
on. If this does not solve the problem, press  
the RESET button on the navigation system.  
! Update the iPod software version.  
Songs on iPod connected with iPod content/data has been up-  
If you update the iPod data, activate [VR Cat-  
this system cannot be available dated, but the data on this systems alog Mode] to catalog/transfer the music in-  
as voice commands or different memory has not been updated yet. formation to this system and synchronize the  
song or title from the one that  
you said is recognized.  
(i.e., system has not cataloged new music information for voice commands with  
iPod content), or cataloging was not the data on iPod. (Page 166)  
completed)  
Problems with the phone screen  
Symptom Cause  
Action (Reference)  
Dialing is not possible because Your phone is out of range for ser-  
the touch panel keys for dialing vice.  
are inactive.  
Retry after re-entering the range for service.  
The connection between the cellular Perform the connection process.  
phone and the navigation system  
cannot be established now.  
181  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
If the screen becomes frozen...  
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn off  
the engine. Turn the ignition key back to Acc  
off. Then start the engine again, and turn the  
power to the navigation system back on. If this  
does not solve the problem, press the RESET  
button on the navigation system.  
182  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Messages and how to react to them  
The following messages may be displayed by your navigation system. Refer to the table below to  
identify the problem, then take the suggested corrective action.  
There are occasions when you may see error messages other than those shown here. In such a  
case, follow the instructions given on the display.  
Messages for navigation functions  
Message  
When  
What to do (Reference)  
There is no "Pictures" folder.  
Cannot load the image because  
Use appropriate data and store it correctly.  
Please create /Pictures/ folder Picturesfolder is not found in the (Page 156)  
and store the appropriate file inserted external storage device.  
images to be uploaded in that  
Picturesfolder exists on the exter- Use appropriate data and store it correctly.  
Folder.  
nal storage device (USB, SD) but  
there is no loadable data in the  
folder.  
Data Read error.  
The file is corrupt  
Failed to read the data for some rea- Use appropriate data and store it correctly.  
The data is damaged or an attempt Use appropriate data and store it correctly.  
was made to set an image file that (Page 156)  
was not made to specifications as  
the splash screen.  
Connection failed.  
The cellular phones Bluetooth wire- Activate the target phones Bluetooth wire-  
less technology is turned off.  
less technology.  
The cellular phone is paired (con-  
nected) with another device.  
Cancel the pairing (connection) and retry.  
Rejection has been received from  
the cellular phone.  
Operate the target phone and accept the con-  
nection request from the navigation system.  
(Furthermore, check the connection settings  
on your cellular phone.)  
The target cellular phone cannot be Check whether your cellular phone is acti-  
found.  
vated and, whether the distance to your cellu-  
lar phone is not too far.  
Could not find any available  
phone.  
No available phone exists in the sur- ! Activate the target phones Bluetooth wire-  
roundings when the system  
less technology.  
searches for connectable cellular  
! Check whether your cellular phone is acti-  
phones featuring Bluetooth wireless vated and, whether the distance to your cellu-  
technology.  
lar phone is not too far.  
Dataloading failed.  
You may have transferred the data  
! Select a suitable item and format, then  
from your cellular phone in a format retry. (Page 84)  
cannot be received by the naviga-  
tion system.  
! Connect your cellular phone with another  
method again and retry. (Page 73)  
Your mobile phone can not  
support this feature.  
The connected cellular phone has  
no compatibility with the phone  
book transfer function of this navi-  
gation system.  
Depending on the cellular phone, phone  
book transfer may not be available.  
183  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Messages for audio functions  
When problems occur with AV source playback, an error message appears on the display. Refer  
to the table below to identify the problem, then take the suggested corrective action. If the error  
persists, record the error message and contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer service center.  
The messages in ( )will appear on the Rear display.  
Built-in DVD drive (AVIC-X9115BT)  
Message  
Cause  
Action (Reference)  
Reading error  
Dirty  
Clean the disc.  
(ERROR-02-XX)  
Scratched disc  
The disc is loaded upside down  
Electrical or mechanical  
Replace the disc.  
Check that the disc is loaded correctly.  
Press the RESET button. (Page 26)  
Mechanism error  
Region code error (DIFFERENT The disc does not have the same re- Replace the DVD-Video with one bearing the  
REGION DISC)  
gion number as the navigation sys- correct region number.  
tem.  
NON-PLAYABLE DISC  
This type of disc cannot be played  
by the navigation system  
Replace the disc with one the navigation sys-  
tem can play.  
Thermal error (THERMAL PRO- The temperature of the navigation  
TECTION IN MOTION)  
Wait until the units temperature returns to  
system is outside of the normal op- within normal operating limits.  
erating range.  
Error not defined (ERROR-FF- Undefined error  
Press the RESET button. (Page 26)  
FF)  
Non-playable tracks are  
skipped. (FILE SKIPPED)  
Files that are protected by digital  
rights management.  
The protected files are skipped.  
Impossible to play all tracks.  
(PROTECTED DISC)  
All the files on the inserted disc are Replace the disc.  
secured by DRM.  
Flash writing error. Impossible The playback history for VOD con-  
! Retry.  
to write on the flash. (CAN  
tents cannot be saved for some rea- ! If the message appears frequently, consult  
NOT SAVE DATA)  
son.  
your dealer.  
Authorization Error (AUTHOR- The device does not match the de-  
Check whether this device has been regis-  
IZATION ERROR)  
vice registered with the VOD provi- tered with the VOD provider.  
der. VOD content cannot be played  
back.  
NON-PLAYABLE FILE  
VOD rental contents file error  
Try saving again.  
If the message appears frequently, consult  
your dealer.  
Played back a disc with incompati- Playback a disc with compatible format.  
ble format.  
Press track list to play and  
title will appear.  
The disc has too many files for all ti- Touch the one of listed items to play.  
tles to be displayed at once.  
Built-in CD drive (AVIC-X7115BT)  
Message  
Cause  
Action (Reference)  
Clean the disc.  
Reading error  
Dirty  
(ERROR-11, 12, 17, 30)  
Scratched disc  
Replace the disc.  
184  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Electrical or mechanical  
Turn the ignition switch OFF and back ON, or  
switch to a different source, then back to the  
CD player.  
Reading error  
(ERROR-10, 11, 12, 15, 17, 30,  
A0)  
Reading error  
(ERROR-15)  
The inserted disc does not contain Replace the disc.  
any data.  
Reading error  
(ERROR-23)  
The CD format cannot be played  
back.  
Replace the disc.  
Reading error  
(ERROR-22)  
The inserted disc does not contain Replace the disc.  
any files that can be played back.  
Non-playable tracks are  
skipped.  
The inserted disc contains files that Replace the disc.  
are protected by DRM.  
Impossible to play all tracks.  
All the files on the inserted disc are Replace the disc.  
secured by DRM.  
SD/USB/iPod  
Message  
Cause  
Action (Reference)  
Non-playable tracks are  
skipped.  
Files that are protected by digital  
rights management.  
The protected files are skipped.  
Impossible to play all tracks.  
All the files on the inserted external Store playable files.  
storage device are secured by DRM.  
An error occurred on USB con- The USB connector or USB cable is Confirm that the USB connector or USB  
nection. USB devices are not  
available to use and iPod  
power supply is also unavail-  
able.  
short-circuited.  
cable is not caught in something or da-  
maged.  
The connected USB storage device Disconnect the USB storage device and do  
consumes more than 500 mA (maxi- not use it. Turn the ignition switch to OFF,  
mum allowable current).  
then to ACC or ON and then connect the  
compliant USB storage device.  
The USB interface cable for iPod is Confirm that USB interface cable for iPod or  
short-circuited.  
USB cable is not caught in something or da-  
maged.  
Connected iPod is not sup-  
ported. Please check instruc-  
tion manual.  
The iPod is not compatible with this Use an iPod of a compatible version.  
navigation system.  
iPod connection failed. Please Communication failure  
reconnect.  
! Disconnect the cable from iPod. Once iPod  
main menu is displayed, connect the cable  
again.  
! If the message appears frequently, consult  
your dealer.  
Updating VR dictionary.  
Please wait.  
iPod function is restricted because Wait on the iPod basic screen (Music) until  
the navigation system is trying to  
acquire the information needed to  
iPod VR activation process complete.ap-  
pears.  
operate iPod with voice commands Switch the screen to another screen to can-  
from the iPod currently connected. cel the acquiring process. (In such case, the  
acquiring process will resume when the iPod  
basic screen (Music) is displayed.) (Page 166)  
185  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Voice operation is restricted be-  
Wait on the iPod basic screen (Music) until  
cause the navigation system is try- iPod VR activation process complete.ap-  
Voice SynchingMy voice  
system will be busy until Im  
finished, but you can use the  
touch interface  
ing to acquire the information  
pears.  
needed to operate iPod with voice  
Switch the screen to another screen to can-  
commands from the iPod currently cel the acquiring process. (In such case, the  
connected.  
acquiring process will resume when the iPod  
basic screen (Music) is displayed.) (Page 166)  
Other sources  
Message  
Cause  
Action (Reference)  
System detected improper  
connection of Parking Brake  
lead. Please check your con-  
figuration for safety. Please  
see Operation Manual for  
more information regarding  
safe operation.  
Parking brake lead is incorrectly  
connected.  
Confirm once more that their connections are  
correct.  
UPDATING  
The selected channel is not in-  
cluded in your subscription.  
Select another channel.  
Radio is being updated with the lat- Wait until the encryption code is fully up-  
est encryption code. dated.  
186  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
pancies in the distance traveled caused by  
driving along winding roads or up slopes.  
If you use AVIC-X9115BT with connecting the  
speed pulse, the system will become more ac-  
curate than no connection of speed pulse. So  
be sure to connect the speed pulse to get full  
positioning accuracy.  
Positioning technology  
AVIC-X9115BT accurately measures your cur-  
rent location by combining the positioning by  
GPS and by Dead Reckoning.  
AVIC-X7115BT accurately measures your cur-  
rent location by the GPS positioning.  
p The position of the speed detection circuit  
vary depending on the vehicle model. For  
details, consult your authorized Pioneer  
dealer or an installation professional.  
p Some types of vehicles may not output a  
speed signal while driving at just a few kilo-  
meters per hour. In such a case, the current  
location of your vehicle may not be dis-  
played correctly while in traffic congestion  
or in a parking lot.  
Positioning by GPS  
The Global Positioning System (GPS) uses a  
network of satellites orbiting the Earth. Each  
of the satellites, which orbit at a height of  
21 000 km, continually broadcasts radio sig-  
nals giving time and position information. This  
ensures that signals from at least three can be  
picked up from any open area on the earths  
surface.  
The accuracy of the GPS information depends  
on how good the reception is. When the sig-  
nals are strong and reception is good, GPS  
can determine latitude, longitude and altitude  
for accurate positioning in three dimensions.  
But if signal quality is poor, only two dimen-  
sions, latitude and longitude, can be obtained  
and positioning errors are somewhat greater.  
How do GPS and Dead  
Reckoningwork together?  
For maximum accuracy, your navigation sys-  
tem continually compares GPS data with your  
estimated position as calculated from the data  
of built-in sensor. However, if only the data  
from the built-in sensor is available for a long  
period, positioning errors are gradually com-  
pounded until the estimated position becomes  
unreliable. For this reason, whenever GPS sig-  
nals are available, they are matched with the  
data of the built-in sensor and used to correct  
it for improved accuracy.  
p If you use chains on your wheels for winter  
driving or put on the spare wheel, errors  
may suddenly increase because of differ-  
ence in wheel diameter. In such case,  
pressing the RESET button initialize the  
sensor status and it may recover the accu-  
racy to normal condition.  
Positioning by Dead Reckoning”  
The built-in sensor in the navigation system  
also calculates your position. The current loca-  
tion is measured by detecting driving distance  
with the speed pulse, the turning direction  
with the Gyrosensorand inclination of the  
road with the G sensor.  
The built-in sensor can even calculate  
changes of altitude, and corrects for discre-  
187  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Map matching  
When positioning by GPS is  
impossible  
As mentioned, the positioning systems used  
by this navigation system are susceptible to  
certain errors. Their calculations may, on occa-  
sion, place you in a location on the map where  
no road exists. In this situation, the processing  
system understands that vehicles travel only  
on roads, and can correct your position by ad-  
justing it to a nearby road. This is called map  
matching.  
!
GPS positioning is disabled if signals can-  
not be received from more than two GPS  
satellites.  
!
In some driving conditions, signals from  
GPS satellites may not reach your vehicle.  
In this case, it is impossible for the system  
to use GPS positioning.  
In tunnels or en-  
closed parking  
garages  
Under elevated  
roads or similar  
structures  
With map matching  
When driving  
among high build-  
ings  
When driving through  
a dense forest or tall  
trees  
!
!
If a car phone or cellular phone is used  
near the GPS antenna, GPS reception may  
be lost temporarily.  
Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray  
paint or car wax, because this may block  
the reception of GPS signals. Snow buildup  
can also degrade the signals, so keep the  
antenna clear.  
Without map matching  
Handling large errors  
Positioning errors are kept to a minimum by  
combining GPS, Dead Reckoningand map  
matching. However, in some situations, these  
functions may not work properly, and the error  
may become bigger.  
p If a GPS signal have not been received for a  
long time, your vehicles actual position  
and the current position mark on the map  
may diverge considerably or may not be up-  
dated. In such case, once GPS reception is  
restored, accuracy will be recovered.  
188  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
!
If you drive in zigzags.  
Conditions likely to cause  
noticeable positioning errors  
For various reasons, such as the state of the  
road you are traveling on and the reception  
status of the GPS signal, the actual position of  
your vehicle may differ from the position dis-  
played on the map screen.  
If the road has a series of hairpin bends.  
!
!
If you make a shallow turn.  
If there is a parallel road.  
!
If there is a loop or similar road configura-  
tion.  
!
!
If there is another road very nearby, such  
as in the case of an elevated freeway.  
!
!
If you take a ferry.  
If you take a recently opened road that is  
not on the map.  
If you are driving on a long, straight road or  
a gently curving road.  
189  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
If you are on a steep mountain road with  
many height changes.  
!
!
If trees or other obstacles block the GPS  
signals for a considerable period.  
If you drive very slowly, or in a start-and-  
stop manner, as in a traffic congestion.  
!
!
If you enter or exit a multi-storey parking lot  
or similar structure using a spiral ramp.  
If your vehicle is turned on a turntable or si-  
milar structure.  
!
If you join the road after driving around a  
large parking lot.  
!
!
When you drive around a traffic circle.  
!
If your vehicles wheels spin, such as on a  
gravel road or in snow.  
When starting driving immediately after  
starting the engine.  
!
If you put on chains, or change your tires  
for ones with a different size.  
Route setting information  
Route search specifications  
Your navigation system sets a route to your  
destination by applying certain built-in rules to  
the map data. This section provides some use-  
ful information about how a route is set.  
190  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
drive towards your destination for a while,  
and try route calculation again.  
CAUTION  
When a route is calculated, the route and voice  
guidance for the route are automatically set.  
Also, for day or time traffic regulations, only infor-  
mation about traffic regulations applicable at the  
time when the route was calculated is shown.  
One-way streets and street closures may not be  
taken into consideration. For example, if a street  
is open during the morning only, but you arrive  
later, it would be against the traffic regulations so  
you cannot drive along the set route. When driv-  
ing, please follow the actual traffic signs. Also,  
the system may not know some traffic regula-  
tions.  
!
When there is a traffic congestion ahead, a  
detour route may not be suggested if driv-  
ing through the traffic congestion would  
still be better than taking the detour.  
There may be instances when the starting  
point, the waypoint and the destination  
point are not on the highlighted route.  
The number of traffic circle exits displayed  
on the screen may differ from the actual  
number of roads.  
!
!
Route highlighting  
!
Once set, the route is highlighted in bright  
color on the map.  
!
The calculated route is one example of the  
route to your destination decided by the na-  
vigation system while taking the type of  
streets or traffic regulations into account. It  
is not necessarily an optimum route. (In  
some cases, you may not be able to set the  
streets you want to take. If you need to take  
a certain street, set a waypoint on that  
street.)  
!
The immediate vicinity of your starting  
point and destination may not be high-  
lighted, and neither will areas with particu-  
larly complex road layouts. Consequently,  
the route may appear to be cut off on the  
display, but voice guidance will continue.  
Auto reroute function  
!
!
If the destination is too far, there may be in-  
stances where the route cannot be set. (If  
you want to set a long-distance route going  
across several areas, set waypoints along  
the way.)  
!
If you deviate from the set route, the system  
will re-calculate the route from that point  
so that you remain on track to the destina-  
tion.  
This function may not work under certain  
conditions.  
!
During voice guidance, turns and intersec-  
tions from the freeway are announced.  
However, if you pass intersections, turns,  
and other guidance points in rapid succes-  
sion, some may delay or not be announced.  
It is possible that guidance may direct you  
off a freeway and then back on again.  
In some cases, the route may require you  
to travel in the opposite direction to your  
current heading. In such cases, you are in-  
structed to turn around, so please turn  
around safely by following the actual traffic  
rules.  
Supplemental information about  
directions  
!
!
Symbol  
Meanings  
Freeway  
Freeway exit left/right  
Traffic circle (clockwise and anti-clock-  
wise)  
Ferry landings (port of departure or arri-  
val)  
!
In some cases, a route may begin on the  
opposite side of a railway or river from your  
actual current location. If this happens,  
Car only road (start and end)  
191  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
Do not touch the recorded surface of the  
discs.  
Car train (start and end)  
Other information  
!
!
Store discs in their cases when not in use.  
Avoid leaving discs in excessively hot envir-  
onments including under direct sunlight.  
Do not attach labels, write on or apply che-  
micals to the surface of the discs.  
To clean a disc, wipe it with a soft cloth,  
moving outward from the center.  
!
!
Supplemental information about  
traffic icon  
Icon  
Meanings  
Stop-and-go traffic  
Stopped traffic  
Closed/blocked roads  
Accidents, constructions, etc.  
Road works  
!
!
Condensation may temporarily impair the  
built-in drives performance. Leave it to ad-  
just to the warmer temperature for about  
one hour. Also, wipe any damp discs with a  
soft cloth.  
Playback of discs may not be possible be-  
cause of disc characteristics, disc format,  
recorded application, playback environ-  
ment, storage conditions and so on.  
Road shocks may interrupt disc playback.  
Read the precautions for discs before  
using them.  
Road narrows, lane closures  
Warnings, other dangers  
Bad weather conditions  
Police ahead  
!
!
Ambient conditions for playing  
a disc  
Handling and care of discs  
Some basic precautions are necessary when  
handling your discs.  
!
At extremely high temperatures, a tempera-  
ture cutout protects this product by switch-  
ing it off automatically.  
!
Despite our careful design of the product,  
small scratches that do not affect actual  
operation may appear on the disc surface  
as a result of mechanical wear, ambient  
conditions for use or handling of the disc.  
This is not a sign of the malfunction of this  
product. Consider it to be normal wear and  
tear.  
Built-in drive and care  
!
Use only conventional, fully circular discs.  
Do not use shaped discs.  
!
Do not use cracked, chipped, warped, or  
otherwise damaged discs as they may da-  
mage the built-in drive.  
192  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
!
Serious scratches can lead to playback pro-  
Playable discs  
DVD-Video and CD  
DVD and CD discs that display the logos  
shown below generally can be played on this  
built-in DVD drive.  
blems on this navigation system. In some  
cases, a DualDisc may become stuck in  
the disc loading slot and will not eject. To  
prevent this, we recommend you refrain  
from using DualDisc with this navigation  
system.  
DVD-Video  
Please refer to the manufacturer for more  
detailed information about DualDiscs.  
Dolby Digital  
AVIC-X9115BT will down-mix Dolby Digital sig-  
nals internally and the sound will be output by  
the stereo.  
CD  
p Manufactured under license from Dolby  
Laboratories. Dolbyand the double-D  
symbol are trademarks of Dolby  
Laboratories.  
p
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo  
Licensing Corporation.  
p It is not possible to play DVD-Audio discs.  
This DVD drive may not be able to play all  
discs bearing the marks shown above.  
DTS sound  
DTS audio cannot be output, so select an  
audio setting other than DTS.  
DTSis registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.  
AVCHD recorded discs  
This unit is not compatible with discs recorded  
in AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Defi-  
nition) format. Do not insert AVCHD discs. If  
inserted, the disc may not be ejected.  
Playing DualDisc  
!
DualDiscs are two-sided discs that have a  
recordable CD for audio on one side and a  
recordable DVD for video on the other.  
Playback of the DVD side is possible with  
this navigation system. However, since the  
CD side of DualDiscs is not physically com-  
patible with the general CD standard, it  
may not be possible to play the CD side  
with this navigation system.  
!
!
Frequent loading and ejecting of a Dual-  
Disc may result in scratches to the disc.  
193  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Detailed information for  
playable media  
Compatibility  
Common notes about disc compatibility  
!
!
!
!
Certain functions of this product may not  
be available for some discs.  
Compatibility with all discs is not guaran-  
teed.  
It is not possible to play back DVD-ROM/  
DVD-RAM discs.  
Playback of discs may become impossible  
with direct exposure to sunlight, high tem-  
peratures, or depending on the storage  
conditions in the vehicle.  
CD-R/CD-RW discs  
!
!
Unfinalized discs cannot be played back.  
It may not be possible to play back CD-R/  
CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD re-  
corder or a personal computer because of  
disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on  
the disc, or dirt, scratches or condensation  
on the lens of the built-in drive.  
!
Playback of discs recorded on a personal  
computer may not be possible, depending  
on the recording device, writing software,  
their settings, and other environmental fac-  
tors.  
DVD-Video discs  
!
DVD-Video discs that have incompatible re-  
gion numbers cannot be played on this  
DVD drive. The region number of the player  
can be found on this products chassis.  
!
!
Please record with the correct format. (For  
more details, please contact manufacturer  
of media, recorders, or writing software.)  
Titles and other text information recorded  
on a CD-R/CD-RW disc may not be dis-  
played by this product (in the case of audio  
data (CD-DA)).  
DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD-R DL (Dual  
Layer) discs  
!
Unfinalized discs which have been re-  
corded with the Video format (video mode)  
cannot be played back.  
!
Read the precautions with CD-R/CD-RW  
discs before using them.  
!
Discs which have been recorded with the  
Video Recording format (VR mode) can be  
played back. However, unfinalized discs  
may not be played back. Unplayable discs  
should be finalized.  
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) discs which have  
been recorded with Layer Jump recording  
cannot be played back.  
For more information about recording  
mode, please contact the manufacturer of  
media, recorders, or writing software.  
The following logo indicates that this unit is  
compatible with DVD-RW discs which have  
been recorded with the Video Recording  
format (VR mode).  
Common notes about the external  
storage device (USB, SD)  
!
Depending on the kind of the external sto-  
rage device (USB, SD) you use, this naviga-  
tion system may not recognize the storage  
device or files may not be played back prop-  
erly.  
!
!
!
!
Do not leave the external storage device  
(USB, SD) in any location with high tem-  
peratures.  
!
!
The text information of some audio and  
video files may not be correctly displayed.  
File extensions must be used properly.  
194  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
There may be a slight delay when starting  
playback of files on an external storage de-  
vice (USB, SD) with complex folder hierar-  
chies.  
Operations may vary depending on the  
kind of an external storage device (USB,  
SD).  
It may not be possible to play some music  
files from SD or USB because of file char-  
acteristics, file format, recorded applica-  
tion, playback environment, storage  
conditions, and so on.  
SD memory card and SDHC memory card  
!
For more details about SD memory card  
compatibility with this navigation system,  
!
!
Handling guidelines and  
supplemental information  
!
This system is not compatible with Multi  
Media Card (MMC).  
!
Copyright protected files cannot be played  
back.  
!
Video playback from SD or USB will be  
paused when the navigation is displayed.  
Notes specific to DivX files  
!
Only DivX files downloaded from DivX part-  
USB storage device compatibility  
ner sites are guarantee for proper opera-  
tion. Unauthorized DivX files may not  
operate properly.  
DRM rental files cannot be operated until  
playing back is started.  
The navigation system corresponds to a  
DivX file display of up to 1 590 minutes 43  
seconds. Search operations beyond this  
time limit are prohibited.  
DivX VOD file playback requires supplying  
the ID code of this navigation system to the  
DivX VOD provider. Regarding the ID code,  
= For more details about USB storage device  
compatibility with this navigation system,  
Protocol: bulk  
!
!
Subclass: SCSI (06h)  
!
!
!
You cannot connect a USB storage device  
to this navigation system via a USB hub.  
Partitioned USB memory is not compatible  
with this navigation system.  
Firmly secure the USB storage device when  
driving. Do not let the USB storage device  
fall onto the floor, where it may become  
jammed under the brake or gas pedal.  
There may be a slight delay when starting  
playback of audio files encoded with image  
data.  
Some USB storage devices connected to  
this navigation system may generate noise  
on the radio.  
Do not connect anything other than the  
USB memory device.  
!
!
!
Plays all versions of DivX video (including  
DivX 6) with standard playback of DivX  
media files.  
For more details about DivX, visit the follow-  
ing site:  
!
!
!
http://www.divx.com/  
DivX subtitle files  
!
Srt format subtitle files with the extension  
.srtcan be used.  
Only one subtitle file can be used for each  
DivX file. Multiple subtitle files cannot be  
associated.  
The sequence of audio files on USB mem-  
ory  
For USB memory, the sequence is different  
from that of USB memory device.  
!
195  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
Subtitle files that are named with the same  
character string as the DivX file before the  
extension are associated with the DivX file.  
The character strings before the extension  
must be exactly the same. However, if there  
is only one DivX file and one subtitle file in  
a single folder, the files are associated even  
if the file names are not the same.  
!
!
!
The subtitle file must be stored in the same  
folder as the DivX file.  
Up to 255 subtitle files may be used. Any  
more subtitle files will not be recognized.  
Up to 64 characters can be used for the  
name of the subtitle file, including the ex-  
tension. If more than 64 characters are  
used for the file name, the subtitle file may  
not be recognized.  
!
The character code for the subtitle file  
should comply with ISO-8859-1. Using char-  
acters other than ISO-8859-1 may cause the  
characters to be displayed incorrectly.  
The subtitles may not be displayed correctly  
if the displayed characters in the subtitle  
file include control code.  
For materials that use a high transfer rate,  
the subtitles and video may not be comple-  
tely synchronized.  
!
!
!
If multiple subtitles are programed to dis-  
play within a very short time frame, such as  
0.1 seconds, the subtitles may not be dis-  
played at the correct time.  
196  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Media compatibility chart  
General  
DVD-R/-RW/-  
R DL  
AVIC-  
CD-R/-RW  
AVIC-  
X7115BT  
CD-R/-RW  
AVIC-  
X9115BT  
USB storage  
device  
(All models)  
SD memory  
card  
(All models)  
Media  
X9115BT  
ISO9660 level 1,  
ISO9660 level 2,  
Romeo, Joliet  
and UDF 1.02  
ISO9660 level 1,  
ISO9660 level 2,  
Romeo and Joliet  
File system  
FAT16/FAT32  
Maximum number  
of folders  
FAT32: No limit.  
FAT16: 512 (including files)  
99  
255  
Maximum number  
of files  
FAT32: No limit.  
FAT16: 512 (including folders)  
999  
3 500  
MP3, WMA,  
AAC, WAV  
MP3, WMA, AAC, WAV, AVI,  
MPEG-4  
Playable file types  
MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX  
MP3 compatibility  
DVD-R/-RW/-  
R DL  
AVIC-  
X9115BT  
CD-R/-RW  
AVIC-  
X7115BT  
CD-R/-RW  
AVIC-  
X9115BT  
USB storage  
device  
(All models)  
SD memory  
card  
(All models)  
Media  
File extension  
Bit rate  
.mp3  
8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR  
16 kHz to 48 kHz (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz for empha-  
sis)  
Sampling frequency  
16 kHz to 48 kHz  
ID3 tag  
ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3  
ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, 1.1, 2.3  
Notes:  
!
!
Ver. 2.x of ID3 Tag is given priority when both Ver. 1.x and Ver. 2.x exist.  
The navigation system is not compatible with the following:  
MP3i (MP3 interactive), mp3 PRO, m3u playlist  
197  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
WMA compatibility  
DVD-R/-RW/-  
R DL  
AVIC-  
CD-R/-RW  
AVIC-  
X7115BT  
CD-R/-RW  
AVIC-  
X9115BT  
USB storage  
device  
(All models)  
SD memory  
card  
(All models)  
Media  
X9115BT  
File extension  
Bit rate  
.wma  
Ver. 9: 5 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR),  
VBR  
Ver. 7 or 8: 128 kbps to 192 kbps  
(CBR), VBR  
48 kbps to  
320 kbps (CBR), 5 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR  
VBR  
Sampling frequency 32 kHz to 48 kHz 8 kHz to 48 kHz  
Note:  
!
The navigation system is not compatible with the following:  
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional, Lossless, Voice  
WAV compatibility  
DVD-R/-RW/-  
R DL  
AVIC-  
CD-R/-RW  
AVIC-  
X7115BT  
CD-R/-RW  
AVIC-  
X9115BT  
USB storage  
device  
(All models)  
SD memory  
card  
(All models)  
Media  
X9115BT  
File extension  
Format  
.wav  
.wav  
Linear PCM  
(LPCM), MS  
ADPCM  
Linear PCM (LPCM), IMA-ADPCM  
LPCM: 16 kHz to  
48 kHz  
Sampling frequency MS ADPCM:  
22.05 kHz and  
LPCM: 16 kHz to 48 kHz  
IMA-ADPCM: 22.05 kHz and  
44.1 kHz  
AVIC-X9115BT cannot play WAV  
files on the built-in DVD drive.  
44.1 kHz  
LPCM: 8 bits  
and 16 bits  
MS ADPCM:  
LPCM: 8 bits and 16 bits  
IMA-ADPCM: 3 bits and 4 bits  
Quantization bits  
4 bits  
Note:  
The sampling frequency shown in the display may be rounded.  
198  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
AAC compatibility  
DVD-R/-RW/-  
R DL  
AVIC-  
CD-R/-RW  
AVIC-  
X7115BT  
CD-R/-RW  
AVIC-  
X9115BT  
USB storage  
device  
(All models)  
SD memory  
card  
(All models)  
Media  
X9115BT  
File extension  
Bit rate  
.m4a  
16 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR)  
11 kHz to  
8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR)  
Sampling frequency  
8 kHz to 44.1 kHz  
44.1 kHz  
Notes:  
!
!
The navigation system plays back AAC files encoded by iTunes.  
The navigation system is not compatible with the following:  
Apple Lossless, files encoded with VBR  
DivX compatibility  
DVD-R/-RW/-  
R DL  
AVIC-  
CD-R/-RW  
AVIC-  
X7115BT  
CD-R/-RW  
AVIC-  
X9115BT  
USB storage  
device  
(All models)  
SD memory  
card  
(All models)  
Media  
X9115BT  
File extension  
.avi/.divx  
Profile (DivX ver-  
sion)  
Home Theater Ver. 3.11/Ver. 4.x/  
Ver. 5.x/Ver. 6.x  
Compatible audio  
codec  
MP3, Dolby Digital  
AVIC-X7115BT  
cannot play  
DivX files.  
DivX files on the external storage  
device (USB, SD) cannot be played.  
Bit rate (MP3)  
8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR  
Sampling frequency  
(MP3)  
16 kHz to 48 kHz (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,  
48 kHz for emphasis)  
Maximum image  
size  
720 pixels × 576 pixels  
4 GB  
Maximum file size  
Notes:  
!
The navigation system is not compatible with the following:  
DivX Ultra format, DivX files without video data, DivX files encoded with LPCM (Linear PCM) audio codec  
Depending on the file information composition, such as the number of audio streams, there may be a slight  
delay in the start of playback on discs.  
!
!
!
!
If a file contains more than 4 GB, playback stops before the end.  
Some special operations may be prohibited because of the composition of DivX files.  
Files with high transfer rates may not be played back correctly. The standard transfer rate is 4 Mbps for CDs and  
10.08 Mbps for DVDs.  
199  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
AVI compatibility  
DVD-R/-RW/-  
R DL  
AVIC-  
CD-R/-RW  
AVIC-  
X7115BT  
CD-R/-RW  
AVIC-  
X9115BT  
USB storage  
device  
(All models)  
SD memory  
card  
(All models)  
Media  
X9115BT  
File extension  
.avi  
Compatible video  
codec  
MPEG-4  
Compatible audio  
codec  
ADPCM  
AVI files cannot be played on the built-in drive.  
Image size: VGA (640 pixels x 480  
pixels)  
Recommended  
video specifications  
Bit rate: 480 kbps  
Frame rate: 24 fps  
MPEG-4 compatibility  
DVD-R/-RW/-  
R DL  
AVIC-  
CD-R/-RW  
AVIC-  
X7115BT  
CD-R/-RW  
AVIC-  
X9115BT  
USB storage  
device  
(All models)  
SD memory  
card  
(All models)  
Media  
X9115BT  
File extension  
.mp4  
Compatible video  
codec  
MPEG-4  
Compatible audio  
codec  
AAC  
MPEG-4 files cannot be played on the built-in drive.  
Image size: VGA (640 pixels x 480  
pixels)  
Recommended  
video specifications  
Bit rate: 480 kbps  
Frame rate: 24 fps  
Common notes  
!
This navigation system can recognize up to  
32 characters, beginning with the first char-  
acter, including extension for the file and  
folder name. Depending on the display  
area, the navigation system may try to dis-  
play them with a reduced font size. How-  
ever, the maximum number of the  
characters that you can display varies ac-  
cording to the width of each character, and  
of the display area.  
!
The navigation system may not operate cor-  
rectly, depending on the application used  
to encode WMA files.  
!
Depending on the version of Windows  
Media Player used to encode WMA files,  
album names and other text information  
may not be correctly displayed.  
!
!
There may be a slight delay when starting  
playback of audio files encoded with image  
data.  
The navigation system is not compatible  
with packet write data transfer.  
!
Folder selection sequence or other opera-  
tions may be altered, depending on the en-  
coding or writing software.  
200  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
Regardless of the length of blank section  
between the songs of original recording,  
compressed audio discs play with a short  
pause between songs.  
Bluetooth is a short-range wireless radio con-  
nectivity technology that is developed as a  
cable replacement for cellular phones, hand-  
held PCs and other devices. Bluetooth oper-  
ates in 2.4 GHz frequency range and transmits  
voice and data at speeds up to 1 megabit per  
second. Bluetooth was launched by a special  
interest group (SIG) comprising Ericsson Inc.,  
Intel Corp., Nokia Corp., Toshiba and IBM in  
1998, and it is currently developed by nearly  
2 000 companies worldwide.  
Example of a hierarchy  
The following figure is an example of the tier  
structure in the disc. The numbers in the fig-  
ure indicate the order in which folder numbers  
are assigned and the order to be played back.  
: Folder  
!
The Bluetoothâ word mark and logos are re-  
gistered trademarks owned by Bluetooth  
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by  
Pioneer Corporation is under license. Other  
trademarks and trade names are those of  
their respective owners.  
: File  
1
2
3
About the SAT RADIO  
READY Logo  
4
5
6
Level 1  
Level 2 Level 3 Level 4  
The SAT RADIO READY logo indicates that the  
Satellite Radio Tuner for Pioneer (i. e., XM  
tuner and Sirius satellite tuner which are sold  
separately) can be controlled by this naviga-  
tion system. Please inquire with your dealer or  
nearest authorized Pioneer service station re-  
garding the satellite radio tuner that can be  
connected to this navigation system.  
Notes  
!
!
This product assigns folder numbers. The user  
cannot assign folder numbers.  
If there is a folder that does not contain any  
playable file, the folder itself will display in the  
folder list but you cannot check any files in  
the folder. (A blank list will appear.) Also,  
these folders will be skipped without display-  
ing the folder number.  
Note:  
The system will use direct satellite-to-receiver  
broadcasting technology to provide listeners  
in their cars and at home with crystal-clear  
sound seamlessly from coast to coast. Satel-  
lite radio will create and package over 100  
channels of digital- quality music, news,  
sports, talk and childrens programming.  
SAT Radio, the SAT Radio logo and all re-  
lated marks are trademarks of Sirius Satellite  
Radio inc., and XM Satellite Radio Inc.  
Bluetooth  
201  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
HD Radio Technology  
DivX  
HD Radioä and the HD Radio Ready logo are  
proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital  
Corporation.  
SD and SDHC logo  
DivX is a compressed digital video format cre-  
ated by the DivX video codec from DivX, Inc.  
This unit can play DivX video files recorded on  
CD-R/RW/ROM and DVD-R/RW/ROM discs.  
Keeping the same terminology as DVD video,  
individual DivX video files are called Titles.  
When naming files/titles on a CD-R/RW or a  
DVD-R/RW disc prior to burning, keep in mind  
that by default they will be played in alphabeti-  
cal order.  
SD Logo is a trademark.  
SDHC Logo is a trademark.  
Plays DivXâ video.  
p DivXâ is a registered trademark of DivX,  
Inc., and is used under license.  
WMA  
AAC  
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and  
refers to an audio compression technology  
standard used with MPEG-2 and MPEG-4. Sev-  
eral applications can be used to encode AAC  
files, but file formats and extensions differ de-  
pending on the application which is used to  
encode. This unit plays back AAC files en-  
coded by iTunes version 4.6.  
The Windows Mediaä logo printed on the box  
indicates that this unit can play back WMA  
data.  
WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and  
refers to an audio compression technology  
that is developed by Microsoft Corporation.  
WMA data can be encoded by using Windows  
Media Player version 7 or later.  
Windows Media and the Windows logo are tra-  
demarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation in the United States and/or other  
countries.  
Detailed information  
regarding connectable iPods  
CAUTION  
!
Pioneer accepts no responsibility for data lost  
from an iPod, even if that data is lost while  
using the navigation system.  
202  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
Do not leave the iPod in direct sunlight for ex-  
tended amounts of time. Extended exposure  
to direct sunlight can result in iPod malfunc-  
tion due to the resulting high temperature.  
Do not leave the iPod in any location with  
high temperatures.  
Firmly secure the iPod when driving. Do not  
let the iPod fall onto the floor, where it may be-  
come jammed under the brake or gas pedal.  
this navigation system, avoid exposing it to  
direct sunlight as much as possible.  
The LCD screen should be used within the  
temperature ranges shown in Specifica-  
tions.  
Do not use the LCD screen at temperatures  
higher or lower than the operating tem-  
perature range, because the LCD screen  
may not operate normally and could be da-  
maged.  
The LCD screen is exposed in order to in-  
crease its visibility within the vehicle.  
Please do not press strongly on it as this  
may damage it.  
!
!
!
!
For details, refer to the iPods manuals.  
!
iPod  
!
!
Do not push the LCD screen with excessive  
force as this may scratch it.  
Never touch the LCD screen with anything  
besides your finger when operating the  
Touch panel functions. The LCD screen can  
scratch easily.  
Made for iPodmeans that an electronic ac-  
cessory has been designed to connect specifi-  
cally to iPod and has been certified by the  
developer to meet Apple performance stan-  
dards.  
Apple is not responsible for the operation of  
this device or its compliance with safety and  
regulatory standards.  
Liquid crystal display (LCD) screen  
!
If the LCD screen is near the vent of an air  
conditioner, make sure that air from the air  
conditioner is not blowing on it. Heat from  
the heater may break the LCD screen, and  
cool air from the cooler may cause moist-  
ure to form inside the navigation unit, re-  
sulting in possible damage.  
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in  
the U.S. and other countries.  
!
Small black dots or white dots (bright dots)  
may appear on the LCD screen. These are  
due to the characteristics of the LCD  
screen and do not indicate a malfunction.  
The LCD screen will be difficult to see if it is  
exposed to direct sunlight.  
When using a cellular phone, keep the an-  
tenna of the cellular phone away from the  
LCD screen to prevent disruption of the  
video in the form of disturbances such as  
spots or colored stripes.  
iTunes  
!
!
iTunes is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered  
in the U.S. and other countries.  
Using the LCD screen correctly  
Handling the LCD screen  
!
When the LCD screen is subjected to direct  
sunlight for a long period of time, it will be-  
come very hot, resulting in possible da-  
mage to the LCD screen. When not using  
Maintaining the LCD screen  
!
When removing dust from the LCD screen  
or cleaning it, first turn the system power  
off, then wipe with a soft dry cloth.  
203  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
When wiping the LCD screen, take care not  
to scratch the surface. Do not use harsh or  
abrasive chemical cleaners.  
LED (light-emitting diode)  
backlight  
A light emitting diode is used inside the dis-  
play to illuminate the LCD screen.  
!
At low temperatures, using the LED back-  
light may increase image lag and degrade  
the image quality because of the character-  
istics of the LCD screen. Image quality will  
improve with an increase in temperature.  
The product lifetime of the LED backlight is  
more than 10 000 hours. However, it may  
decrease if used in high temperatures.  
If the LED backlight reaches the end of its  
product lifetime, the screen will become  
dimmer and the image will no longer be  
visible. In that case, please consult your  
dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER  
Service Station.  
!
!
204  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Display information  
Destination Menu  
Phone Menu  
Page  
Page  
[Address]  
[Dial Pad]  
[POI]  
[Call Home]  
[Around Current GPS Location]  
[Around Destination]  
[Around Cursor]  
[Along Route]  
[Around entered address]  
[Saved Criteria]  
[Register Search Criteria]  
[Favorites]  
[GOOG-411]  
[Phone Volume]  
[Received Calls]  
[Dialed Numbers]  
[Missed Calls]  
[Phone Book Transfer]  
[Phone Settings]  
[Connection]  
[History]  
[Bluetooth On/Off]  
[USB/SD]  
[Auto Answer Preference]  
[Refuse All Calls]  
[Echo Cancel]  
[Return Home]  
[Delete Route]  
[Saved Routes]  
[Route Function]  
[Route info]  
[Auto Connect]  
[Edit Name]  
[Clear Memory]  
[Itinerary]  
[Bluetooth Software Update]  
[Edit Route]  
[Save Route]  
[Coordinate]  
[MSN Direct]  
205  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Settings Menu  
Navi Settings  
[Sound settings]  
Page  
[About]  
[GPS & Time Settings]  
[Time Settings]  
[Map Visual]  
[POI Settings]  
[3D Settings]  
[Map Settings]  
[Displayed Info]  
[Smart Zoom]  
[Overview Mode]  
[Manage Track Logs]  
[Route]  
[Method:]  
[U-turn penalty:]  
[Unpaved Roads]  
[Highways]  
[Ferries]  
[U-turns]  
[Permit Needed]  
[Toll Roads]  
[Warnings]  
[Warn When Speeding]  
[Regional Settings]  
[Set Home]  
[Demo Mode]  
206  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
System Settings menu  
AV System Settings menu  
Page  
Page  
[Language]  
[AV1 Input]  
[Splash Screen]  
[AV2 Input]  
[Back Camera]  
[Ant CTRL]  
[Screen Calibration]  
[Picture Adjustment]  
[Illumi Color]  
[Wide Mode]  
[MUTE Input/GUIDE]  
[Rear SP]  
[Service Information]  
[Restore/Delete]  
[Restore Factory Settings]  
[Delete user information]  
[Screen Off]  
[VR Catalog Mode]  
207  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
AV Sound Settings menu  
Shortcut menu  
Map Confirmation Screen  
Page  
[FAD/BAL] ([Balance])  
[EQ]  
Page  
[Map]  
[Loudness]  
[Sub Woofer]  
[HPF]  
[Save as...]  
[Add Pin]  
[Add POI]  
[Add Favorite]  
[Route...]  
[Go Here Now]  
[Add Via]  
[Continue]  
[Starting Point]  
[Info]  
[SLA]  
[Bass Booster]  
[Call]  
208  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
DVD Setup  
Page  
[Language]  
[Assist Subtitle]  
[Multi Angle]  
[TV Aspect]  
[Parental]  
[DivX VOD]  
[Auto Play]  
[Subtitle File]  
209  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
DivX  
Glossary  
DivX is a popular media technology created by  
DivX, Inc. DivX media files contain highly com-  
pressed video with high visual quality that  
maintains a relatively small file size. DivX files  
can also include advanced media features like  
menus, subtitles, and alternate audio tracks.  
Many DivX media files are available for down-  
load online, and you can create your own  
using your personal content and easy-to-use  
tools from DivX.com.  
AAC  
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and  
refers to an audio compression technology  
standard used with MPEG-2 and MPEG-4.  
Aspect ratio  
This is the width-to-height ratio of a TV screen.  
A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4:3.  
Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of  
16:9, providing a bigger picture for exceptional  
presence and atmosphere.  
DivX Certified  
DivX Certified products are officially tested by  
the creators of DivX and guaranteed to play all  
versions of DivX video, including DivX 6.  
Bit rate  
This expresses data volume per second, or bps  
units (bits per second). The higher the rate,  
the more information is available to reproduce  
the sound. Using the same encoding method  
(such as MP3), the higher the rate, the better  
the sound.  
Favorites  
A frequently visited location (such as your  
workplace or a relatives home) that you can  
register to allow easy routing.  
Built-in sensor  
The built-in sensor that enables the system to  
estimate your vehicles position.  
GPS  
Global Positioning System. A network of satel-  
lites that provides navigation signals for a vari-  
ety of purposes.  
CD-DA  
This stands for a general music CD (commer-  
cial-release audio CD). In this manual, this  
word is sometime used for a distinction be-  
tween data CDs (which include compressed  
audio files) and general music CDs.  
Guidance mode  
The mode in which guidance is given as you  
drive to your destination; the system automati-  
cally switches to this mode as soon as a route  
has been set.  
Chapter  
Guidance point  
Titles of DVD-Video or DVD-VR are in turn di-  
vided into chapters which are numbered in  
the same way as the chapters of a book. With  
discs featuring chapters, you can quickly find  
a desired scene with chapter search.  
These are important landmarks along your  
route, generally intersections. The next gui-  
dance point along your route is indicated on  
the map by the yellow flag icon.  
Home location  
Your registered home location.  
Current location  
The present location of your vehicle; your cur-  
rent location is shown on the map by a red tri-  
angle mark.  
Destination  
A location you choose as the end point of your  
journey.  
210  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
ID3 tag  
File names can have up to 128 characters.  
JPEG  
This stands for Joint Photographic Experts  
Group, and is an international still image com-  
pression standard.  
This is a method of embedding track-related  
information in an MP3 file. This embedded in-  
formation can include the track title, the ar-  
tists name, the album title, the music genre,  
the year of production, comments and other  
data. The contents can be freely edited using  
software with ID3 Tag editing functions.  
Although the tags are restricted by the num-  
ber of characters, the information can be  
viewed when the track is played back.  
MP3  
MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an  
audio compression standard established by a  
working group (MPEG) of the ISO (Interna-  
tional Standards Organization). MP3 is able to  
compress audio data to about 1/10th the size  
of a conventional disc.  
ISO9660 format  
This is the international standard for the for-  
mat logic of DVD/CD-ROM folders and files.  
For the ISO9660 format, there are regulations  
for the following two levels:  
MPEG  
This stands for Moving Pictures Experts  
Group, and is an international video image  
compression standard.  
Level 1:  
The file name is in 8.3 format (the name con-  
sists of up to 8 characters, half-byte English  
capital letters, half-byte numerals and the _”  
sign, with a file-extension of three characters).  
Level 2:  
The file name can have up to 31 characters (in-  
cluding the separation mark .and a file ex-  
tension). Each folder contains less than 8  
hierarchies.  
Multi-angle  
With regular TV programs, although multiple  
cameras are used to simultaneously shoot  
scenes, only images from one camera at a  
time are transmitted to your TV. Some DVDs  
feature scenes shot from multiple angles, let-  
ting you choose your viewing angle as desired.  
Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog)  
Some videos feature dialog recorded in multi-  
ple languages or audio recorded in multiple  
tracks. For example, dialog in up to 8 lan-  
guages can be recorded on a single DVD-Vi-  
deo, letting you choose the language as  
desired.  
Extended formats  
Joliet:  
File names can have up to 64 characters.  
Romeo:  
File names can have up to 128 characters.  
!
Level 1:  
The file name is in 8.3 format (the name  
consists of up to 8 characters, half-byte  
English capital letters, half-byte numerals  
and the _sign, with a file-extension of  
three characters).  
Multi-session  
Multi-session is a recording method that al-  
lows additional data to be recorded later.  
When recording data on a CD-ROM, CD-R or  
CD-RW, etc., all data from beginning to end is  
treated as a single unit or session. Multi-ses-  
sion is a method of recording more than 2 ses-  
sions in one disc.  
!
!
Level 2:  
The file name can have up to 31 characters  
(including the separation mark .and a file  
extension). Each folder contains less than 8  
hierarchies.  
Extended formats  
Joliet:  
Multi-subtitle  
For example, subtitles in up to 32 languages  
can be recorded on a single DVD-Video, letting  
you choose as desired.  
File names can have up to 64 characters.  
Romeo:  
211  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Packet write  
tains three separate videos, they are divided  
into title 1, title 2 and title 3. This lets you enjoy  
the convenience of title search and other func-  
tions.  
This is a general term for a method of writing  
individual files to a CD-R, etc. whenever re-  
quired, just as is done with files on floppy or  
hard disks.  
Track log  
Parental lock  
Your navigation system logs routes that you al-  
ready passed through if the track logger is ac-  
tivated. This recorded route is called a track  
log. It is handy when you want to check a  
route traveled or if returning along a complex  
route.  
Some DVD-Video discs with violent or adult-or-  
iented scenes feature parental lock which pre-  
vents children from viewing such scenes. With  
this kind of disc, if you set the units parental  
lock level, playback of scenes inappropriate for  
children will be disabled, or these scenes will  
be skipped.  
VBR  
VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally  
speaking, CBR (constant bit rate) is more  
widely used. But by flexibly adjusting the bit  
rate according to the needs of audio compres-  
sion, it is possible to achieve compression-  
priority sound quality.  
Phone book  
An address book on users phone is collec-  
tively referred to as Phone book. Depending  
on the cellular phone, the Phone bookmay  
be called a name such as Contacts, Busi-  
ness cardor something else.  
Voice guidance  
Point of Interest (POI)  
The giving of directions by navigation voice  
while in guidance.  
Point Of Interest; any of a range of locations  
stored in the data, such as railway stations,  
shops, restaurants, and amusement parks.  
Waypoint  
A location that you choose to visit before your  
destination; a journey can be built up from  
multiple waypoints and the destination.  
Region number  
DVD players and DVD discs feature region  
numbers indicating the area in which they  
were purchased. Playback of a DVD is not pos-  
sible unless it features the same region num-  
ber as the DVD player.  
WMA  
WMA is short for Windows Mediaä Audio and  
refers to an audio compression technology  
that is developed by Microsoft Corporation.  
Route setting  
The process of determining the ideal route to a  
specific location; route setting is done auto-  
matically by the system when you specify a  
destination.  
Set route  
The route marked out by the system to your  
destination. It is highlighted in bright color on  
the map.  
Title  
DVD-Video or DVD-VR discs have a high data  
capacity, enabling recording of multiple videos  
on a single disc. If, for example, one disc con-  
212  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Audio  
Specifications  
Maximum power output ....... 50 W × 4  
General  
50 W × 2 ch/4 W + 70 W ×  
Rated power source ............... 14.4 V DC  
1 ch/2 W (for subwoofer)  
Continuous power output ... 22 W × 4 (50 Hz to 15 kHz,  
5 %THD, 4 W LOAD, Both  
(allowable voltage range:  
10.8 V to 15.1 V DC)  
Grounding system ................... Negative type  
Channels Driven)  
Maximum current consumption  
........................................... 10.0 A  
Dimensions (W × H × D):  
Chassis ............................... 178 mm × 100 mm ×  
157 mm  
Load impedance ...................... 4 W (4 W to 8 W [2 W for 1 ch]  
allowable)  
Preout output level (max) .... 2.2 V  
Preout impedance .................. 1 kohm  
Equalizer (3-Band Parametric Equalizer):  
Low  
(7 in. × 3-7/8 in. × 6-1/8 in.)  
Nose ..................................... 170 mm × 96 mm × 8 mm  
(6-3/4 in. × 3-3/4 in. ×  
Frequency ................ 40 Hz/80 Hz/100 Hz/160 Hz  
Q Factor .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 dB  
when boosted)  
3/8 in.)  
Weight:  
Gain ............................ 12 dB  
Mid  
AVIC-X9115BT ................. 2.2 kg (4.9 lbs)  
AVIC-X7115BT ................. 2.1 kg (4.7 lbs)  
NAND flash memory ............. 2 GB  
Frequency ................ 200 Hz/500 Hz/1 kHz/2 kHz  
Q Factor .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 dB  
when boosted)  
Navigation  
GPS Receiver:  
Gain ............................ 12 dB  
High  
System ................................ L1, C/Acode GPS  
SPS (Standard Positioning  
Service)  
Reception system .......... 30-channel multi-channel  
reception system  
Frequency ................ 3.15 kHz/8 kHz/10 kHz/  
12.5 kHz  
Q Factor .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 dB  
when boosted)  
Gain ............................ 12 dB  
Loudness contour:  
Reception frequency .... 1 575.42 MHz  
Sensitivity .......................... 140 dBm (typ)  
Position update frequency  
........................................... Approx. once per second  
GPS antenna:  
Low ....................................... +3.5 dB (100 Hz), +3 dB  
(10 kHz)  
Mid ....................................... +10 dB (100 Hz), +6.5 dB  
(10 kHz)  
Antenna ............................. Micro strip flat antenna/  
right-handed helical polari-  
zation  
High ..................................... +11 dB (100 Hz), +11 dB  
(10 kHz)  
(volume: 30 dB)  
Antenna cable ................. 5.0 m (16 ft. 5 in.)  
Dimensions (W × H × D)  
........................................... 33 mm × 15 mm × 36 mm  
(1-1/4 in. × 5/8 in. ×  
HPF:  
Frequency .......................... 50 Hz/63 Hz/80 Hz/100 Hz/  
125 Hz  
Slope .................................... 12 dB/oct  
Subwoofer:  
1-3/8 in.)  
Weight ................................ 96 g (0.2 lbs)  
Frequency .......................... 50 Hz/63 Hz/80 Hz/100 Hz/  
125 Hz  
Display  
Slope .................................... 18 dB/oct  
Gain ...................................... 24/+6 dB  
Phase .................................. Normal/Reverse  
Bass boost:  
Screen size/aspect ratio ....... 5.8 inch wide/16:9  
(effective display area:  
128 mm × 72 mm)  
Pixels ............................................. 384 000 (800 × 480)  
Display method ........................ TFT Active matrix driving  
Color system .............................. NTSC compatible  
Tolerable temperature range:  
Gain ...................................... 0 dB to +12 dB  
DVD drive (AVIC-X9115BT)  
System .......................................... DVD-Video, CD, MP3, WMA,  
AAC, DivX system  
Usable discs .............................. DVD-Video, CD, MP3, WMA,  
AAC, DivX  
Power on ............................ +14 °F to +140 °F  
Power off ............................ 4 °F to +176 °F  
213  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Region number ........................ 1  
Signal format:  
Max memory capacity ........... 8 GB  
File system .................................. FAT16, FAT32  
Decoding format ...................... MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE/  
MPEG4  
Sampling frequency ..... 44.1 kHz/48 kHz/96 kHz  
Number of quantization bits  
........................................... 16 bit/20 bit/24 bit; linear  
Frequency response ............... 5 Hz to 44 000 Hz (with DVD,  
at sampling frequency  
Bluetooth  
Version .......................................... Bluetooth 1.2 certified  
Output power ............................ +4 dBm Max.  
(Power class 2)  
96 kHz)  
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 97 dB (1 kHz) (IHF-A net-  
work)  
FM tuner  
(CD: 96 dB (1 kHz) (IHF-A  
network))  
Dynamic range ......................... 95 dB (1 kHz) (CD: 94 dB  
(1 kHz))  
Frequency range ...................... 87.9 MHz to 107.9 MHz  
Usable sensitivity ..................... 8 dBf (0.7 µV/75 W, mono,  
S/N: 30 dB)  
Distortion ..................................... 0.008 % (1 kHz)  
Output level:  
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 75 dB (IHF-A network)  
Distortion ..................................... 0.3 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz,  
stereo)  
0.1 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz,  
mono)  
Frequency response ............... 30 Hz to 15 000 Hz ( 3 dB)  
Stereo separation .................... 45 dB (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz)  
Video .................................... 1.0 Vp-p/75 W ( 0.2 V)  
Audio ................................... 1.0 V (1 kHz, 0 dB)  
Number of channels .............. 2 (stereo)  
MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG-1 & 2 Audio Layer 3  
WMA decoding format ......... Ver.9.0 L3  
AAC decoding format ............ MPEG-4 AAC (only encoded  
by iTunes):  
AM tuner  
Frequency range ...................... 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz  
(10 kHz)  
Usable sensitivity ..................... 18 µV (S/N: 20 dB)  
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 65 dB (IHF-A network)  
.m4a  
DivX decoding format ............ Home Theater Ver.3.11,  
Ver.4.X, Ver.5.X, Ver.6.X :  
.avi, .divx  
CD drive (AVIC-X7115BT)  
CEA2006 Specifications  
System .......................................... CD, MP3, WMA, AAC sys-  
tem  
Usable discs .............................. CD, MP3, WMA, AAC, WAV  
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 94 dB (1 kHz) (IHF-A net-  
work)  
MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG-1 & 2 Audio Layer 3  
WMA decoding format ......... Ver.7,7.1,8,9,10 (2 ch audio)  
(Windows Media Player)  
AAC decoding format ............ MPEG-4 AAC (iTunes en-  
coded only)  
Power output ............................. 14 W RMS × 4 Channels  
(4 W and 1 % THD+N)  
S/N ratio ....................................... 91 dBA (reference: 1 W into  
4 W)  
WAVE SIGNAL FORMAT ...... Linear-PCM, MS ADPCM  
(Non Compressed)  
Note  
USB  
Specifications and design are subject to possible  
modifications without notice due to im-  
provements.  
USB standard spec. ............... USB 2.0 High Speed  
Max current supply ................. 500 mA  
Max memory capacity ........... 2 GB  
File system .................................. FAT16, FAT32  
USB class .................................... Mass storage class  
Decoding format ...................... MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE/  
MPEG4  
SD  
Compatible physical format  
..................................................... Version 2.00  
214  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PIONEER CORPORATION  
4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KU  
TOKYO 153-8654, JAPAN  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.  
P.O. Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A.  
TEL: (800) 421-1404  
PIONEER EUROPE NV  
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium/Belgique  
TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.  
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936  
TEL: 65-6472-7555  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.  
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia  
TEL: (03) 9586-6300  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.  
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada  
TEL: 1-877-283-5901  
TEL: 905-479-4411  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V.  
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso  
Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000  
TEL: 55-9178-4270  
 
: 台北4413  
: (02) 2521-3588  
司  
9901-6  
: (0852) 2848-6488  
Published by Pioneer Corporation.  
Copyright © 2009 by Pioneer Corporation.  
All rights reserved.  
Printed in China  
<KYTZX> <09F00000>  
<CRB3081-A/S> UC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Peavey Musical Instrument Amplifier 120 120 User Manual
Pelco Security Camera SS5723L User Manual
Phase Technology Portable Speaker FL 8 User Manual
Philips TV Antenna MNT510F User Manual
Pioneer Blu ray Player BDP LX71 User Manual
Planar Projector PR3010 User Manual
Poulan Lawn Mower 183064 User Manual
Poulan Trimmer 530164133 User Manual
Primera Technology Label Maker RW 12 User Manual
PYLE Audio Automobile Accessories PNVU200 User Manual